4 Instrument Cluster 10: 2005 Freestar (Win) Owners Guide (Post-2002-Fmt) USA (Fus)

Table of Contents
Introduction 4
Instrument Cluster 10
Warning and control lights 10
Gauges 15
Entertainment Systems 18
AM/FM stereo 18
AM/FM stereo with CD 20
AM/FM stereo with in-dash six CD 23
AM/FM stereo cassette with CD 26
Climate Controls 34
Manual heating and air conditioning 34
Rear window defroster 44
Lights 45
Headlamps 45
Turn signal control 49
Bulb replacement 51
Driver Controls 56
Windshield wiper/washer control 56
Steering wheel adjustment 57
Power windows 68
Mirrors 69
Speed control 71
Message center 79
Locks and Security 94
Keys 94
Locks 94
Anti-theft system 108
2005 Freestar (win)

Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Table of Contents
Seating and Safety Restraints 112
Seating 112
Safety restraints 137
Airbags 152
Child restraints 164
Tires, Wheels and Loading 178
Tire Information 178
Changing tires 183
Lug Nut Torque 191
Low tire warning system 200
Vehicle loading 203
Trailer towing 210
Recreational towing 214
Driving 215
Starting 215
Brakes 219
Transmission operation 223
Roadside Emergencies 229
Getting roadside assistance 229
Hazard flasher switch 230
Fuel pump shut-off switch 230
Fuses and relays 231
Jump starting 239
Wrecker towing 245
Customer Assistance 246
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 254
Cleaning 255
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Table of Contents
Maintenance and Specifications 261
Engine compartment 263
Engine oil 264
Battery 268
Engine Coolant 270
Fuel information 275
Air filter(s) 292
Part numbers 292
Refill capacities 293
Lubricant specifications 294
Accessories 300
Index 302
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical

including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright 2005 Ford Motor Company
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Introduction
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more
you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
In the United States: www.ford.com
In Canada: www.ford.ca
In Australia: www.ford.com.au
In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owners Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on this Owners Guide when reselling the vehicle. It
is an integral part of the vehicle.
Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an accident the
safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump
shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Introduction
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide

How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle

When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 500 miles (800 km) before towing a
trailer. For more detailed information about towing a trailer, refer to
Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils during
the first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation, since these
additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Introduction
SPECIAL NOTICES
Emission warranty
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper
Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 6.0L
Power Stroke Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible
for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a
detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to
the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owners
Guide.
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your
vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle event data recorders are capable of
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The
recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.
The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the
occupants, potentially including information such as:
how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;
how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal;
how fast the vehicle was traveling; and
where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected
to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent,
unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Introduction
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
Please read the section Supplemental restraint system (SRS)
in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. Failure to follow
the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should

NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger air bag.
MIDDLE EAST/NORTH AFRICA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION

For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the ones that are described
in this Owners Guide; therefore, a supplement has been supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the pages in the provided
supplement, you can properly identify those features, recommendations
and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. Refer to this
Owners Guide for all other required information and warnings.
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert See Owners Guide
Fasten Safety Belt Air Bag-Front
Air Bag-Side Child Seat
Child Seat Installation Child Seat Lower

Warning Anchor
Child Seat Tether

Brake System
Anchor
Brake Fluid -
Anti-Lock Brake System
Non-Petroleum Based
Powertrain Malfunction Speed Control
Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield Rear Window

Defrost/Demist Defrost/Demist
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Power Window Lockout
Front/Rear
Interior Luggage
Child Safety Door
Compartment Release
Lock/Unlock
Symbol
Panic Alarm Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,

Battery Acid
or Sparks
Explosive Gas Fan Warning
MAX
Maintain Correct Fluid
Power Steering Fluid MIN
Level
Emission System Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Jack
Air Filter
Low tire pressure

Check fuel cap
warning
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause extensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicles functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
Check engine: The Check Engine
indicator light illuminates when the
ignition is first turned to the ON
position to check the bulb. Solid
illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
10
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Check fuel cap: Illuminates when
the fuel cap may not be properly
installed. Continued driving with
this light on may cause the Check
engine warning light to come on,
refer to Fuel filler cap in the
Maintenance and Specification chapter.
Brake system warning light: To
confirm the brake system warning ! P
light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the BRAKE
ignition is turned to the ON position
when the engine is not running, or in a position between ON and START,
or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ON
position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this
time, seek service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination
after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the
brake system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer.
Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer.
Anti-lock brake system: If the

ABS light stays illuminated or
continues to flash, a malfunction has ABS
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
Air bag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when ignition is turned
to ON, continues to flash or remains
on, have the system serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer. A chime will also sound when a
malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been detected.
11
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A chime will also
sound to remind you to fasten your
safety belt.
Check transaxle: Illuminates when

a transaxle problem has been
detected and shifting may be
restricted. If the light remains on,
have the system serviced
immediately by your authorized
dealer.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
Engine oil pressure: Illuminates

when the oil pressure falls below the
normal range, refer to Engine oil in
the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
Engine coolant temperature: Illuminates when the engine coolant
temperature is high. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the
engine and let cool. Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
Without Message Center
With Message Center

Never remove the coolant
reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
12
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Traction Control or AdvanceTrac active (if equipped):
Illuminates when the Traction Control is active, refer to the Driving
chapter for more information.
Without Message Center TRAC
ACTIVE
With Message Center
Traction Control or TRAC

AdvanceTrac off light
(if equipped): Illuminates when OFF
the Traction Control has been
disabled (by the driver or as a result of a system failure). Refer to the
Driving chapter for more information.
Low tire pressure warning:
Illuminates when your tire pressure
is low. If the light remains on at
start up or while driving, the tire
pressure should be checked. Refer
to Inspecting and Inflating Your Tires in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter. When the ignition is first turned to ON, the light will
illuminate for 3 seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does
not turn ON, have the system inspected by your authorized dealer. For
more information on this system, refer to Understanding Your Tire
Pressure Monitoring System in the Tires, Wheels and Loading
chapter.
Low fuel: Illuminates when the fuel
level in the fuel tank is at or near
empty (refer to Fuel gauge in this
chapter).
Speed control: Illuminates when

the speed control is engaged. Turns
off when the speed control system
is disengaged.
13
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Low washer fluid: Illuminates when the windshield washer fluid is low.
With Message Center
Door ajar: Illuminates when the ignition is in the ON position and any
door is open.
With Message Center

Displays which door or the liftgate is
open.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the

left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
Bulb warning: Illuminates when one of the exterior front turn lamps or
rear brake/turn/tail lamps bulb has burned out.
14
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
With Message Center
Displays which bulb is burned out.
Depress the RESET control to clear.
High beams: Illuminates when the

high beam headlamps are turned on.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the

ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the drivers door
is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
drivers door is opened.
Turn signal warning chime: Sounds when the turn signal lever has
been activated to signal a turn and not turned off after the vehicle is
driven more than 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
GAUGES
15
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
Engine coolant temperature

gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between H and
C). If it enters the red section,
the engine is overheating. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
Odometer: Registers the total miles (kilometers) of the vehicle.

To switch the display from Metric to
English, press and hold the button
on the cluster for three seconds.
The temperature display in the overhead console (if equipped) will also
be changed.
With Message Center
Refer to Message Center in the
Driver Controls chapter on how to
switch the display from Metric to
English.
16
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Trip odometer: Registers the miles (kilometers) of individual journeys.
Press and release the button on the
cluster to toggle between odometer
and trip odometer display. To reset,
press the button again until the trip
reading is 000000.0 miles.
To switch the odometer display and temperature from English to Metric.
With the mileage displayed press and hold the button on the cluster for
three seconds this will change the units.
With Message Center
To reset, press and hold the
message center RESET button for
three seconds to reset.
Tachometer: Indicates the engine

speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
Fuel gauge: Indicates

approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the ON position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
The arrow near the fuel pump icon
indicates which side of the vehicle
the fuel filler door is located.
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
17
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
AM/FM STEREO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. / Tuner: Press to
manually go up or down the radio
frequency. Also use in menu mode
to select various settings.
2. Audio: Press to access select
various settings.
Treble: Press to adjust the treble setting. Use / / SEEK,

SEEK .
Bass: Press to adjust the bass setting. Use / / SEEK,
SEEK .
Balance: Press to adjust the audio between the left and right speakers.
Use / / SEEK, SEEK .
Fade: Press to adjust the audio between the front and rear speakers.
Use / / SEEK, SEEK .
18
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
3. Seek: Press to access the
next/previous strong station or
track.
4. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station, press and
hold a preset button until sound returns.
5. AM/FM: Press to select AM/FM
frequency band.
6. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn

ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease
volume.
If the volume is set above a certain
level and the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back on at a
nominal listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on.
7. CLK (Clock): Press to toggle
between the clock and radio display.
To set the clock: Press and hold
CLK until the hours begin to flash.
Press / to manually decrease / increase the hours. Press CLK
again to set the minutes.
When this audio is used in cargo vans where no rear speakers are
installed in the vehicle, fading to the rear speakers will result in no audio
output.
19
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
AM/FM STEREO/ SINGLE CD SOUND SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
2. Phone/mute: Press to mute the
playing media. Press again to return
to the playing media.
3. Menu: Press to toggle through
the following modes:
Autoset: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without
losing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2 . Press
MENU to access. Use / / SEEK to set.
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
Bass: Press to adjust the bass setting. Use / / SEEK .
20
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Treble: Press to adjust the treble setting. Use / / SEEK .

Use / / SEEK .
Use / / SEEK .
Speed sensitive volume (if equipped): Radio volume automatically
changes slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind
noise. Press MENU to access and use / / SEEK to adjust.
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SELECT HOUR or SELECT
MINUTE is displayed. Use / to manually increase/decrease Press
MENU again to disengage clock mode.
If your vehicle is equipped with an in-dash clock, refer to Setting the
clock in the Driver Controls chapter.
4. Aux: Press to toggle between
FES/DVD and AUX modes. If no
auxiliary sources are available, NO
AUX AUDIO will be displayed.
5. Seek: Press to access the next
strong station or track.
6. Text: In CD mode, this feature

reads track name, artist name, and
disc name (if available).
7. Shuffle: Press to play tracks in
random order.
8. Comp (Compression): In CD
mode, brings soft and loud CD
passages together for a more
consistent listening level.
9. Repeat: Press to repeat the
current CD track.
21
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
10. Fast forward: Press to
manually advance in a CD track.
11. Rewind: Press to manually

reverse in a CD track.

13. Scan: Press for a brief sampling
of radio stations or CD tracks. Press
again to stop.
previous strong station or track.

frequency band.

volume.
17. CD: Press to enter CD mode. If
a CD is already loaded into the
system, CD play will begin where it
ended last.
18. CD eject: Press to eject a CD.
19. CD slot: Insert a CD label side

up.
22
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
PREMIUM IN-DASH SIX CD SOUND SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Use / / SEEK .
Use / / SEEK .
23
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
MINUTE is displayed. Press / / SEEK to adjust the
hours/minutes.
4. Aux: Press to toggle between
AUX AUDIO will be displayed.
6. Text: In CD mode, press to

display the track name, artist name
and disc name (if available).
7. Shuffle: Press to play tracks in
random order.
8. Comp (Compression): In CD
mode, brings soft and loud CD
current CD track.
24
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
manually advance in a CD track.

reverse in a CD track.

again to stop.

frequency band.

volume.
ended last.
18. LOAD: Press to load a CD, then
select a slot number using the radio
presets 1 through 6. If you dont
select a slot within 5 seconds, the
radio shall choose the first available
slot for you. Press and hold for 2 seconds to auto load up to six CDs.
19. CD eject: Press to eject a CD,
then select the desired CD slot
using the radio presets 1 through 6.
25
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
If a slot is not selected within 5 seconds, the radio shall eject the current
disc. Press and hold for 2 seconds to auto eject all CDs present in the
radio mechanism.
up.
AM/FM STEREO CASSETTE/SINGLE CD SOUND SYSTEM

(IF EQUIPPED)

26
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)

Use / / SEEK .
Use / / SEEK .
MINUTE is displayed. Press / / SEEK to adjust the
hours/minutes.
Clean tape reminder: After 20 hours of cassette operation, the radio
will notify you that it is time to clean the cassette player head. After
cleaning the player head, you can clear the reminder through menu
control and selecting YES.
5. AUX: Press to toggle between
AUX AUDIO will be displayed. To return to radio mode, press AM/FM.
27
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
6. Tape eject: Press to eject a tape.
7. Text: In CD mode, displays track

title, artist name, and disc title (if
available).
8. Shuffle: Press to play CD tracks
in random order.
9. Compress (Compression): In
CD mode, brings soft and loud CD
current CD track.

manually advance in a CD track or
cassette.
reverse in a CD track or cassette.

14. Tape: Insert a tape facing to the
right.
15. Tape direction: Press to enter

tape mode. Press while in play mode
to change which side of the tape is
playing.
frequency band.
28
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
volume.
ended last.
19. CD eject: Press to eject a CD.

up.
21. Seek:Press to access the


again to stop.
When this radio is used in cargo vans where no rear speakers are
installed in the vehicle, fading to the rear speakers will result in no audio
output.
AUXILIARY AUDIO CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)

Your vehicle may be equipped with auxiliary audio controls. This feature
allows the front and middle seat passengers to listen to different media
sources (radio, cassette, CD or DVD) simultaneously. (However, the front
and middle-seat passengers cannot listen to two different radio stations
at the same time.)
29
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
1. Volume: Press to /
increase/decrease volume control.
2. Media: Press to select from
different playing medias.
3. / : Press to activate dual
play mode and enable the rear seat
passengers to hear audio through
the headphones. Press again to
deactivate.
4. MEM: Press consecutively to scroll through the preset stations,
change tape side (if equipped), or to change discs on multiple disc
radios (if equipped).
5. SEEK: Press / to access the next/previous strong radio station,
cassette selection or CD track.
When the rear seat controls are activated, rear seat passengers can use
the controls to change the playing media for all passengers (Single Play
mode). In this mode, all speakers will play audio from the same media
source for all passengers to hear.
If there is a discrepancy between the rear seat controls and the front
audio controls (such as both trying to listen to the same playing media),
the front audio system will receive the desired selection.
To activate Dual Play mode (rear seat passengers listen to a different
playing media than the front seat passengers):
Press the speaker/headphone control.
Press MEDIA to change audio sources (for headphone mode only).
Use the SEEK, VOLUME and MEMORY controls to make adjustments
Parental control
Simultaneously press the radio COMPRESS
preset controls 3 and 5 to

enable/disable the rear seat audio
controls as well as the Family Entertainment system (if equipped).
30
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Dual play mode
Press / on the rear seat audio COMPRESS
controls or simultaneously press the

radio preset controls 2 and 4 to
enable/disable dual play.
During dual play, the rear vehicle speakers will be deactivated and the
wired headphones (if equipped) will become active. Two different medias
can be played in the vehicle simultaneously:
The driver can select a media from the main radio face (radio, tape,
CD or DVD if equipped) and listen using the front speakers.
Rear seat passengers may listen to a different media source than the
front passengers (radio, tape, CD or DVD if equipped) using 3.5 mm
wired headphones (not included) that shall be plugged into the
headphone icon jacks on the rear audio control face. Infrared
headphones are included in vehicles equipped with the Family
Entertainment System and shall only be used to listed to the media
(DVD or CD) that is playing in the Family Entertainment System.
Wireless headphones will not play audio from any other sources
(AM, FM, tape, or Radio CD).
The front and rear seat passengers cannot listen to two different radio
stations at the same time.
RADIO FREQUENCIES
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM - 530, 5401700, 1710 kHz
FM - 87.7, 87.9107.7, 107.9 MHz
RADIO RECEPTION FACTORS
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
31
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
CASSETTE/PLAYER CARE
Do:
Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a pen or pencil into the hole and
turning the hub.
Remove loose labels before inserting tapes.
Allow tapes which have been subjected to extreme heat, humidity or
cold to reach a moderate temperature before playing.
Clean the cassette player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after
1012 hours of play to maintain good sound/operation.
Dont:
Use cassettes that are longer than 90 minutes.
Expose tapes to direct sunlight, extreme humidity, heat or cold.
Leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not being
played.
CD/CD PLAYER CARE
Do:
Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner
and wipe from the center out.
Dont:
Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
For vehicles equipped with a six disc CD changer, dont insert more
than one disc into each slot of the CD changer magazine.
Clean using a circular motion.
32
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
AUDIO SYSTEM WARRANTY AND SERVICE
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If
service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified technician.
33
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the vehicle.
2. Air flow selections: Controls
the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief
description on each control.
MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated
air through the instrument panel
vents only to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more
economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce
undesirable odors from entering the vehicle.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and the floor
vents.
O (OFF): Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
: Distributes air through the floor vents.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and floor
vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents. Can
be used to clear ice or fog from the windshield.
3. R Rear defroster: Press to defrost the rear window. Refer to
Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more information.
4. Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation
in cabin. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to cool down
the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors
from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculation engages
automatically with selection of MAX A/C or can be engaged manually in
any other airflow selection except defrost. Recirculation may turn off
automatically in all airflow selections except MAX A/C.
5. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
automatically in MAX A/C, and .
6. Fan speed adjustment: Controls the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
34
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
Operating tips
To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the position.
To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
airflow selector in the O (OFF) or with recirculated air engaged.
Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
For maximum cooling performance (MAX A/C):
In the MAX A/C mode:
Move the temperature control selector to the coldest setting.
Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust to maintain
passenger comfort.
In the and modes:
Select A/C and recirculated air . Use with A/C to provide
colder airflow.
passenger comfort.
In extremely cold temperatures, to maximize overall heater performance
it is suggested to not operate the auxiliary system (if so equipped) until
the engine temperature gauge crosses into the normal operating range.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select .
2. Select A/C.
3. Set the temperature control to full heat.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
35
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
DUAL ZONE MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
WITH REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CLIMATE CONTROL
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Air flow selections: Controls
the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief
description on each control.
MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated
air through the instrument panel
vents only to cool the vehicle. This
re-cooling of the interior air is more
economical and efficient.
Recirculated air may also help
reduce undesirable odors from
entering the vehicle.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and the floor
vents.
O (OFF): Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off.
: Distributes air through the floor vents.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and floor
vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents. Can
be used to clear thin ice or fog from the windshield.
Auxiliary climate control operation: Turn the front air flow control
(1) to any position except O (OFF).
2. R Rear fan speed control: Press to enable the auxiliary system
or to adjust the rear fan speed from the front control. The rear fan speed
settings available are 4, 3, 2, 1 and O (OFF).
3. REAR: Press to enable the control located in the rear seat. Press
again to turn the auxiliary system off.
36
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
4. REAR Rear temperature control: Press to enable the

auxiliary system and to set the desired rear cabin airflow temperature
with the front control. The rear cabin airflow temperature will match the
driver airflow temperature setting when only the center rear temperature
light ( REAR ) is illuminated. The rear cabin airflow temperature
will be warmer or cooler than the driver airflow temperature setting
when more than one rear temperature light ( REAR ) is
illuminated.
5. R Rear defroster: Press to activate/deactivate rear window
defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more
information.
in cabin. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to cool down
the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors
from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculation engages
automatically with selection of MAX A/C or can be engaged manually in
any other airflow selection except . Recirculation may turn off
automatically in all airflow selections except MAX A/C.
automatically in MAX A/C, and .
8. Fan speed adjustment: Controls the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
9. Left temperature selection: Controls the temperature of the airflow
to the driver in the front of the vehicle.
10. Right temperature selection: Controls the temperature of the
airflow to the passenger in the front of the vehicle.
Operating tips
airflow selector in the O (OFF) or with recirculated air engaged.
the windshield.
37
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
In the MAX A/C mode:
passenger comfort.
In the and modes:
Select A/C and recirculated air . Use with A/C to provide
colder airflow.
passenger comfort.
1. Select .
2. Select A/C.
3. Set the temperature control to full heat.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
38
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH REAR
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CLIMATE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster

vents. Can be used to clear thin ice or fog from the windshield.
2. Rear temperature control: Press to enable the auxiliary system and
set the desired rear cabin airflow temperature with the front control. The
rear cabin airflow temperature will match the driver airflow temperature
setting when only the center rear temperature bar (REAR) is
illuminated. The rear cabin airflow temperature will be warmer or cooler
than the driver airflow temperature setting when more than one rear
temperature bar (REAR) is illuminated.
3. Passenger temperature control: Press to increase/decrease the
temperature for the passenger in the front of the vehicle.
4. R Rear defroster: Press to activate/deactivate the rear window
information.
39
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
in the vehicle cabin. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculated air can be
engaged manually in any airflow selection except . Recirculated air
may turn off automatically in all airflow selections.
automatically in AUTO, , and .
8. : Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and floor
vents.
9. : Distributes air through the floor vents.
10. : Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and the floor
vents.
11. : Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
12. Manual override controls: Allows you to change the system
operation. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
13. F Front fan speed control: Press to manually increase or
decrease the fan speed. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
14. OFF: Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off.
15. Driver temperature control: Press to increase or decrease the
temperature on the driver side of the cabin. Sets the passenger side
temperature also when DUAL is disengaged. Note: The recommended
vehicle cabin setting is between 72F (22C) and 75F (24C).
Dual temperature control: Press and hold AUTO to
engage/disengage separate passenger side temperature control.
16. AUTO: Press to engage full automatic operation, and select the
desired temperature using the temperature control. The system will
automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on or off, and
outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the
desired temperature.
40
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH
HEATED SEATS AND REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
CLIMATE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster

vents. Can be used to clear thin ice or fog from the windshield.
2. Rear temperature control: Press to enable the auxiliary system and
set the desired rear cabin airflow temperature with the front control. The
rear cabin airflow temperature will match the driver airflow temperature
setting when only the center rear temperature bar (REAR) is
illuminated. The rear cabin airflow temperature will be warmer or cooler
than the driver airflow temperature setting when more than one rear
temperature bar (REAR) is illuminated.
3. Passenger temperature control: Press to increase/decrease the
temperature for the passenger in the front of the vehicle.
4. R Rear defroster: Press to activate/deactivate the rear window
information.
6. Passenger heated seat control: Press once to activate the high
heat setting (2 indicator lights). Press again to activate the low heat
setting (1 indicator light). Press again to deactivate the passenger heated
seat.
41
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
7. :Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and the
floor vents.
8. : Distributes air through the floor vents.
9. : Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and the floor
vents.
10. : Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
11. Manual override controls: Allows you to change the system
operation. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
12. Driver heated seat control: Press once to activate the high
heat setting (2 indicator lights). Press again to activate the low heat
setting (1 indicator light). Press again to deactivate the passenger heated
seat.
13. F Front fan speed control: Press to manually increase or
decrease the fan speed. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
14. Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air
recirculation in the vehicle cabin. Recirculated air may reduce the
amount of time to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also
help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle.
Recirculated air can be engaged manually in any airflow selection
except . Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow
selections.
automatically in AUTO, , and .
16. OFF: Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off.
17. Driver temperature control: Press to increase or decrease the
temperature on the driver side of the cabin. Sets the passenger side
temperature also when DUAL is disengaged. Note: The recommended
vehicle cabin setting is between 72F (22C) and 75F (24C).
Dual temperature control: Press and hold AUTO to
engage/disengage separate passenger side temperature control.
18. AUTO: Press to engage full automatic operation, and select the
desired temperature using the temperature control. The system will
automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on or off, and
outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the
desired temperature.
42
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
OPERATING TIPS
airflow selector in the OFF or with recirculated air engaged.
the windshield.
In AUTO mode, press AUTO control and set to desired temperature.
In manual override control, select or , A/C and recirculated
air and set the temperature to 60F (16C). Set the fan to the
highest speed initially, then adjust to maintain passenger comfort.
To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 23 minutes after starting the vehicle or until the vehicle has
aired out.
1. Select .
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan to the highest speed.
43
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Climate Controls
AUXILIARY CLIMATE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed: Turn to select the
desired fan speed.
2. Temperature/mode selection:
The distribution of air from the
overhead and floor registers is based
on the temperature selected. Turn
to select for comfort.
To use the rear climate controls,
ensure that REAR is pressed on the
main climate control face.
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER R

The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and
works to clear the rear window of fog and thin ice. If equipped, the
heated outside mirrors also operate with this control to remove snow,
mist and ice from the side mirrors.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter. The cabin air filter
restricts the entry of airborne dust and pollen particles. The filter is
located just in front of the windshield under the cowl vent screen on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
For more information, or to replace the filter, see your Ford or Lincoln
Mercury dealer.
44
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Turns the lamps off.
Turns on the parking lamps,
P
instrument panel lamps, license
plate lamps and tail lamps.
Turns the headlamps on.
Note: Some vehicles may be equipped with a headlamps on with

wipers feature. In order for this feature to work:
the ignition must be in run and the front wipers must be on greater
than 10 seconds except during a mist wipe or while the wipers are on
to clear washer fluid during a wash condition.
the headlamps and park lamps must be turned off when the ignition is
in off or accessory position, or the front wipers are off for more than
30 seconds while the ambient light level is at daytime brightness.
Autolamp control (if equipped)

The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally A P
controlled by the headlamp control.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for a fixed period of time
after the ignition switch is turned to
OFF.
To turn autolamps on, rotate the
control counterclockwise to .
To turn autolamps off, rotate the control clockwise to .
45
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Lights
Autolamps - Programmable exit delay
Programmable exit delay allows the length of the autolamp exit delay to
be changed. Once in the programming mode, the headlamps and
parklamps will turn on to indicate the start of the time desired.
To program the auto lamp exit time delay:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position and the headlamp control
in the autolamp position.
2. Deselect the auto lamps.
3. Put the ignition in RUN.
4. Put the ignition in OFF.
5. Select the autolamps.
Note: Steps 2 through 5 must be performed within a 10 second
period.
At this point, the headlamps and park lamps will turn on.
6. Deselect the auto lamps after the desired auto lamp delay time
(maximum of 3 minutes).
At this point, the headlamps and park lamps will turn off.
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the lowbeam headlamps on with a reduced output. To activate:
the key must be in the ON position,
the headlamp control is in the OFF, parking lamps or autolamp
position,
and the transmission must be out of PARK.
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Light (DRL) System
does not activate your tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
46
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Lights
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
Battery saver
The battery saver will shut off the exterior lamps and interior lamps,
except the hazard warning lamps if activated, 10 minutes after the
ignition control has been turned off. The battery saver will extend the
time-out period for courtesy lamps to 30 minutes if the liftgate is ajar or
the dome lamp is on via manual activation using the dome lamp switch
or the headlamp switch, whichever is provided. The system will not turn
off the parking lamps if the headlamp control is in the PARK position.
For interior lights, refer to Illuminated entry in the Locks and security
chapter.
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel during headlight
and parklamp operation.
Rotate the thumbwheel from left
to right to brighten the
instrument panel.
Rotate the thumbwheel from right
to left to dim the instrument
panel.
47
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Lights
Your vehicle also contains a feature called sleeping baby mode in
which the dome lamps will remain off and only the lower lamps will
illuminate. This lighting mode can be activated by rotating the
thumbwheel to the first left detent position (as denoted by the half filled
circle above).
Domelamp Control
The panel dimmer control also controls the domelamp operation.
Rotate the thumbwheel fully to the right, past detent to activate the
domelamp.
In order to turn off the domelamp, rotate the thumbwheel to the left.
The dome lamp will not illuminate if the control switch is in the OFF
position.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
You will need a #2 Phillips screwdriver to make the adjustments.
Vertical aim adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
(1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
(2) Center height of lamp to
ground
(3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
(4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp to the
ground and mark an 8 foot (2.4
meter) horizontal reference line on
the vertical wall or screen at this
height (a piece of masking tape works well). The center of the lamp is
marked by a 0.5 mm circle on the headlamp lens.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood.
48
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Lights
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with high
intensity flat segments at the top
edge of the pattern. If the flat edges
are not at the horizontal reference
line, the beam will need to be
adjusted.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on

each headlamp, then use a # 2
Phillips screwdriver to turn the
adjuster either counterclockwise (to
adjust up) or clockwise (to adjust
down) positioning the horizontal
edge of the high intensity light on
the horizontal reference line.
6. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT
REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE
AND IS NON-ADJUSTABLE.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL

Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
The cornering lamps feature (if equipped) automatically illuminates the

left or right cornering lamps, located at the front corners of the vehicle,
when the left or right turn signal, is activated. Cornering lamps are to
provide better visibility of the area where the driver intends to turn.
49
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Lights
INTERIOR LAMPS
The interior lights illuminate when:
any door is opened (and the operation switch is in the middle
position).
the instrument panel dimmer switch is moved to the passenger side
position (right position).
any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is OFF
(and the operation switch is in the middle position).
Map lamps (if equipped)
The map lamps and controls are
located on the center overhead
console. Press the raised portion on
each lens to activate the lamps.
Second row & third row dome and map lamps (if equipped)
The second row dome and map lamps are located overhead, above the
second row passenger seats.
The dome lamp will stay on if the
panel dimmer control is moved to
the passenger side position. When
the control is in the middle position,
the lamp will only come on when a
door is opened. If the control is
moved to the drivers side position,
the lamp will not come on at all.
The dome lamp will illuminate whenever a front door is opened. If either
front door has been opened from the outside, the lamp will remain on for
20 seconds after the door is shut. If any other door has been opened
from the inside, the lamp will shut off immediately after the door is
closed.
To activate the map lamps, press the control on either side of the center
operation switch.
50
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Lights
Dome lamps (if equipped)
The front dome lamp is located overhead between the driver and
passenger seats.
The dome lamp will stay on if the
panel dimmer control is moved to
the passenger side position. When
the control is in the middle position,
the lamp will only come on when a
door is opened. If the control is
moved to the drivers side position, the lamp will not come on at all.
The dome lamp will illuminate whenever a front door is opened. If either
front door has been opened from the outside, the lamp will remain on for
20 seconds after the door is shut. If any other door has been opened
from the inside, the lamp will shut off immediately after the door is
closed.
Cargo lamp
The cargo lamp will stay on if the
control is moved to the driver side
position. When the control is in the
middle position, the lamp will only
come on when a door is opened. If
the control is moved to the
passengers side position, the lamp
will not come on at all.
With the ignition key in the ACCESSORY or ON position, the rear cargo
lamp can be turned ON or OFF by sliding the control.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp Condensation
The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure. When moist air enters
the headlamp(s) through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur. This condensation is normal and will clear
within 45 minutes of headlamp operation.
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
51
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Lights
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized D.O.T. for North America and an
E for Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function Trade Number
Front park/turn lamps 3457AK (amber)
Front sidemarker lamp 904NA (amber)
Cornering lamps 3156K
Auxiliary parking lamps 912
Headlamps H13
Rear license plate lamps W5WL
High-mount brake lamp LED (see dealer)
Rear tail/stop/turn lamps 4157K or 3157K
Backup lamps 3156K
Dome lamp (front row) 10W sofitte
Cargo lamp 10W sofitte
Map lamps H6W
Dome lamp (third row) 10W sofitte
Map lamp (overhead console) 906
Stepwell lamp T-562
Front seat footwell 194
Front door mounted courtesy lamp 168
Visor vanity lamp - Slide on Rail system
37
(SOR)
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.
52
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing headlamp bulbs
To remove the headlamp bulb:
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in the OFF position, then open the
hood.
2. Remove the two retainer pins to
release the headlamp assembly and
pull headlamp assembly forward to
expose the back of the bulb.
3. Disconnect the electrical

connector from the bulb by pulling
rearward and unlock the bulb by
rotating it counterclockwise.
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of

childrens reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.

Replacing front parking/turn/sidemarker signal bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position and open the
hood.
2. Remove the two headlamp retaining pins to release the headlamp
assembly, then pull the headlamp assembly forward to expose the bulb
socket.
53
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Lights
3. To remove the side marker bulb,
turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise, and pull the bulb
straight out of the socket.
4. To remove the parking/turn

bulb, turn the socket on the bottom
of the headlamp assembly
counterclockwise and pull the bulb
straight out of the socket.

Replacing tail lamp/backup/turn lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position and open the
liftgate to expose the tail lamp
assembly, then remove the retaining
screws for the lamp assembly.
2. Carefully remove the lamp
assembly.
3. Rotate bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from
lamp assembly.
4. Pull bulb straight out of socket and push in new bulb.
Replacing high-mount brakelamp bulbs
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
54
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing license plate lamp bulb
The license plate bulbs are located in the license plate housing assembly
on the liftgate. To change the license plate bulbs:
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position.
2. Remove the license lamp screw
from the assembly.
3. Pull the lamp down and twist the
bulb socket counterclockwise.
Remove the bulb socket from the
lamp.
4. Pull out the old bulb and push in
the new bulb.
5. Install the bulb socket in the lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.
6. Install the lamp assembly and secure it with the retaining screw.
Replacing supplemental park lamp or cornering lamp bulbs
(if equipped)
The supplemental park or cornering lamp is located on the front fascia,
below the bumper and headlamps.
1. Make sure the park lamp switch
is in the OFF position and then
remove the bulb socket from the
supplemental parking lamp by
turning counterclockwise.
2. Disconnect the electrical
connector.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
55
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
Windshield washer: Push the end

of the stalk:
briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
a quick push and hold: the wipers
will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
a long push and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for
up to ten seconds.
Rear window wiper/washer controls

For rear wiper operation, rotate the
rear window wiper and washer
control to the desired position.
Select:
INT 2 One second interval rear
wiper.
INT 1 Ten second interval rear
wiper.
OFF Rear wiper and washer off.
For rear wash cycle, rotate (and hold as desired) the rear wiper/washer
control to either position.
From either position, the control will automatically return to the INT2 or
OFF position.
56
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Changing the wiper blades
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle
from the wiper arm. Push the lock
pin manually to release the blade
and pull the wiper blade down
toward the windshield to remove it
from the arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
Replace wiper blades at least once
per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved
by cleaning the wiper blades and
the windshield, refer to Windows
and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
TILT STEERING WHEEL

To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull and hold the steering wheel
release control toward you.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down until you find the desired
location.
3. Release the steering wheel
release control. This will lock the
steering wheel in position.
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving.
57
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamp.
Slide on rod feature

Rotate the visor towards the side
window and extend it rearward for
additional sunlight coverage.
Note: To stow the visor back into
the headliner, visor must be
retracted before moving it back
towards the windshield.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)

The appearance of your vehicles overhead console will vary according to
your option package.
Conversation mirror
The conversation mirror allows the
driver to view the rear seating area.
This does not replace the
rear view mirror.
58
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Electronic compass/temperature display (if equipped)
The overhead console may have an electronic compass and outside air
temperature display. The compass heading and outside air temperature
are displayed together - side by side. The display, as a whole, can be
turned on or off by pressing the momentary push-button on the
overhead console. When the vehicle is turned off, the electronics display
will remember the last display state.
Outside air temperature
The temperature can be displayed in
either Centigrade or Fahrenheit.
This is controlled via the Message
Center. Please refer to the Message
Center in this chapter to change
from English to metric. The ignition
key must be in the ON or
ACCESSORY position.
If the outside temperature falls
below 3C (38F), the display will alternate from ICE to the outside
temperature at a two second rate for one minute.
Compass
The vehicle heading is displayed as one of N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and
NW.
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in or on the vehicle may also affect compass
accuracy. Adjustments may need to be made to the zone and calibration
of the compass.
59
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Zone variation mode
1. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in by referring to the zone
map. 3 2 1 15
2. Turn the ignition to the ON 4
position. 14
13
5
12
6 7 8 9 1011
3. Press and hold the momentary

push-button for approximately 4
seconds, until VAR is displayed,
then release it. (Pressing the
momentary push-button for 8
seconds de-calibrates the
compasssee Compass
Calibration Mode).
4. Press the button to increment the
VAR number to the desired VAR
number. Wait 5 seconds without
button activity and the compass will return to the heading mode.
Note: If there is no button activity for 5 seconds, the compass writes the
displayed zone VAR number to memory and exits Zone Variation Mode
Compass calibration mode
1. Press the momentary push button
and hold it for more than 8 seconds.
After 8 seconds, CAL is displayed,
then release it.
Note: After button release CAL will
be displayed with a heading. The
compass is now de-calibrated and
enters the Initial AutoCal Mode.
2. Drive the vehicle in a tight circle
in a magnetically clean area such as
an open parking lot. Drive at a rate not faster than 15 seconds per circle
5 mph (8km/h).
60
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Note: Look for a parking lot away from buildings, light posts, manhole
covers, sewer and drainage grates and other metallic objects. Some
magnetic objects may be hidden underground. Look for signs of
underground utilities, water mains or other industrial structures. The
parking lot should be level and have a smooth surface. Blacktop is
preferred over cement as a cement surface often contains iron
reinforcing bars or metallic mesh that could interfere with the calibration
process.
The CAL indicator will turn off when the calibration process is
complete, leaving the compass heading on the display.
Note: This process normally takes about 112 circles but may take longer
if magnetic noise is present or if the circles are driven too fast.
SLIDING DOOR OPERATION
Manual door operation
If equipped with a Power Sliding Door (PSD), turn the Power Door
Lockout control on the overhead console to the OFF position. Refer to
the Disabling power operation of the PSD section in this chapter for
more information.
Note: Before unlatching the left side door, verify that the fuel fill door is
closed. The left hand door will not open if the fuel door is open.
Slide the door carefully in a controlled manner to the full open position.
At the end of travel, firmly push the door against the bump stop to
engage the hold open mechanism to restrain the door. When operating
the door on a gradient, special care should be taken to manually control
the opening and closing speed of the door.
If the door is allowed to slide open or closed unrestrained,
personal injury or damage to the door could result.
When closing the sliding door, keep the head, hands and other body
parts of vehicle occupants out of the path of the closing door. Slide the
door closed in a careful, controlled manner.
When closing the sliding doors, you should verify they are free of
obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in the
proximity of the sliding door openings. Injury could result if body parts
are caught or pinched in an uncontrolled sliding door.
Manual door operation when vehicle is stopped or parked on a

downhill grade
61
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
In some cases it may be necessary
to have someone hold the door
while rear seat passengers are
entering or exiting the vehicle. The
hold open mechanism will restrain
the door open when the vehicle is
parked on moderate downhill
grades. On more severe grades,
the operator should ensure that
the open door is stable and
secure against the stop, before
allowing passengers to enter or exit the vehicle or before
loading/unloading cargo.
Do not operate vehicle with the door in the open position.
Abrupt vehicle acceleration or deceleration could cause the door
to move suddenly and could result in personal injury or damage to the
door.
If the vehicle is parked on a downhill grade, the door could slam

shut and could result in injury or damage to the door. Ensure
that the open door is secure against the stop before allowing
passengers to enter or exit the vehicle.
Power Sliding Door (PSD) (if equipped)

With this option, you can open and close the sliding door(s) with the
following controls inside your vehicle.
overhead console button
remote entry transmitter button
second row passenger control switch
inside and outside release handle
Opening and closing the PSD
The PSD will operate without the key in the ignition. The transaxle must
be in PARK to open the PSD, when the key is in the ignition and turned
to the ON position.
The sliding door must be unlocked for the PSD to power open from the
rear trim switches and the inside or outside PSD handles. The fuel filler
door must be closed in order to avoid damage to it when the left sliding
door is opened.
62
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
The Power Door Lockout Control is
located in the overhead console.
With the control in the OFF
position, power operation is disabled
from both PSD handles and from
both second row passenger
switches. The overhead console switch and remote entry transmitter will
operate the power doors regardless of the position of the lockout switch.
When opening or closing the sliding doors, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or
pets are not in the proximity of the sliding door openings. Injury could
result if body parts are caught or pinched in an uncontrolled sliding
door.
To power open or close the PSD

from the Overhead console:
Push and release the overhead
console right or left hand control.
Pressing this control will also
simultaneously unlock all doors.
To power open or close the PSD
from the second row passenger
control switch:
Ensure that the PSD is unlocked,
using the remote entry
transmitter or power door unlock.
Refer to Remote Entry System in
the Locks and security chapter.
Push and release the right or left hand second row passenger control.
The control(s) are located on the trim panel in front of the sliding
door.
To power open the PSD with the inside or outside release handle:
Ensure that the PSD is unlocked, using the remote entry transmitter
or power door unlock. Refer to Remote Entry System in the Locks
and security chapter.
Manually pull the inside or outside sliding door handle to engage the
power assist feature. Release the handle as soon as the PSD begins to
power open.
63
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To power close the PSD with the inside or outside release handle:
Manually pull the door about 6 inches in the desired direction of
travel. The power door assist will take over and complete the open or
close operation.
Pressing any of the switches, overhead console, second row passenger, or
remote entry transmitter while the door is moving will cause the door to
either reverse direction or stop depending on the position and direction
of movement of the door.
To power open or close the PSD with the remote entry
transmitter:
Refer to the Remote entry system section in this chapter. Operating the
transmitter will also simultaneously unlock the doors.
Disabling PSD power operation
Pressing the Power Door Lockout Control to the OFF position prevents
power operation of the PSD using the rear seat control(s), inside or
outside handle or by manually moving the door. With the PSD rear
controls disabled, the door(s) can be opened manually with the inside or
outside handles. With the Power Door Lockout control in the OFF
position, the overhead console right and left hand controls and the
Remote Entry System remain functional. Disabling the PSD may be
desirable to prevent power operation of the door by rear seat passengers
or if manual operation of the door is desired or necessary when the
vehicle is stopped or parked on a steep downhill grade.
Refer to the Manual operation of the sliding door section in this
With the child safety lock engaged, the inside handle operation will
always be disabled regardless of the position of the Power Door Lockout
control. Refer to the Sliding door child safety lock section in this
chapter for more information. The trim mounted rear seat control and
the outside handle remain functional for power operation.
Safety/Obstructions
If anything obstructs the Power Sliding Door while it is power closing or
opening, the door will automatically reverse or stop depending on the
position of the door, provided it meets sufficient resistance.
64
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Resetting the PSD
The power sliding door may operate incorrectly or not at all because of
the following conditions:
a low voltage or dead battery
the door is left opened for more than 6 hours
the battery is disconnected
the PSD Passenger compartment fuse panel fuse (fuse #11) is
removed or blown. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
If any of the above conditions has occurred, perform the following steps
to reset the PSD so that electronics can relearn the open and closed
positions:
1. Check to see if PSD is securely closed.
2. Make sure the gearshift is in (P) Park.
3. Push the PSD control on the overhead console to open the door.
4. Wait five (5) seconds and close the door by pressing the PSD control
on the overhead console.
5. Wait five (5) seconds and repeat Steps 3 and 4 then go on to Step 6.
6. Repeat Steps 35 for opposite door.
If the door still does not operate correctly:
7. Ensure the ignition is in the OFF position
8. Remove the PSD fuse (fuse #11) from the passenger fuse panel and
leave it out for thirty (30) seconds. Refer to the chapter on Fuses and
Relays. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside emergencies
chapter.
9. Reinstall the fuse and wait ten (10) seconds.
10. Repeat Steps 16 above.
If the door still does not operate correctly, see your dealer for service.
Sliding Door Child Safety Lock
Your vehicle is equipped with a sliding door child safety lock that helps
prevent passengers from operating the sliding door by using the inside
door handle, refer to the Childproof door locks in the Locks and
security chapter.
65
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To open the sliding door when the
child safety lock is on:
Unlock the sliding door and open
the door from the outside.
Press the right or left hand
control on the overhead console
or the remote to open the door.
The second row passenger switch will still be functional to open the
door. To prevent the second row passenger from operating the PSD,
turn the Power Door Lockout control to the OFF position.
INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGE COMPARTMENT

The storage compartment may be
used to secure sunglasses or similar
sized objects. Press the control to
open the storage compartment.
CLOCK (IF EQUIPPED)

Press the right (+) control to move
the time display forwards.
Press the left (-) control to move
the time display backwards.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)

Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
66
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element (if
equipped).
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s)
over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC/180W.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power
point longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
There are up to three auxiliary power points in the following locations:
Located on the instrument panel.
Located next to the second row

seat.
Located on the right trim panel in

the rear cargo area.
67
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Cigar/Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter
socket.
Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating, this will
damage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released from
its heating position when it is ready to be used.
Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
POWER WINDOWS
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children play with the power windows. They may seriously injure
themselves.
When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free
of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in
the proximity of the window openings.
Press and hold the bottom part of

the rocker switch to open the
window. Press and hold the top part
of the rocker switch to close the
window.
One touch down

Allows the drivers window to open
fully without holding the control
down. Press completely down on
the bottom part of the rocker switch
and release quickly. Press the top
part of the rocker switch to stop.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the window switches and radio may be used for up
to ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or
until any door or trunk is opened.
68
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Power vent windows
The power vent windows are
operated by a single switch located
on the instrument panel. Press and
hold the bottom of the switch to
open or the top of the switch to
close both vent windows.
A sound will be heard when opening
and closing the vent windows. This
is a normal noise that informs you
the windows are operating.
MIRRORS
Automatic dimming inside rear view mirror (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with
an inside rear view mirror with an
auto-dimming function. The
electronic day/night mirror will
change from the normal (high
reflective) state to the non-glare
(darkened) state when bright lights (glare) reach the mirror. When the
mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle, it will automatically
adjust (darken) to minimize glare.
The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when
backing up.
Do not block the sensor on the backside of the inside rear view mirror
since this may impair proper mirror performance.
Power side view mirrors

To adjust your mirrors:
1. Select to adjust the left
mirror or to adjust the right
mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to
lock mirrors in place.
69
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Heated outside mirrors (if equipped)
Both mirrors are heated
automatically to remove ice, mist
and fog when the rear window
defrost is activated.
Do not remove ice from the
mirrors with a scraper or
attempt to readjust the mirror
glass if it is frozen in place.
These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Signal indicator mirrors (if equipped)

When the turn signal is activated,
the appropriate mirror will show a
blinking yellow arrow. When the
park lamps are on, the blinking
arrow will be dimmer.
The arrow provides an additional
warning to other drivers that your
vehicle is about to turn.
When the sliding door is open, the indicator in the appropriate mirror
will flash indicating people may be entering/exiting the vehicle.
Fold-away mirrors
Pull the side mirrors in carefully
when driving through a narrow
space, like an automatic car wash.
70
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)
The accelerator and brake pedal
should only be adjusted when the
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift
lever is in the P (Park) position.
Press and hold the rocker control to
adjust accelerator and brake pedal
toward you or away from you.
The adjustment allows for approximately 2.8 inches (73 mm) of

maximum travel.
Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the
pedals while the vehicle is moving.
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

With speed control set, you can maintain a speed of 30 mph (48 km/h)
or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. Speed
control does not work at speeds below 30 mph (48 km/h).
If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac system, the speed control
will automatically disengage when the road conditions change. When
driving conditions permit you can return to speed control by pressing
RESUME on the speed control. For more information on the
AdvanceTrac system see AdvanceTrac Stability Enhancement
System section in the Driving chapter.
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Setting speed control

The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and release
it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
71
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
3. Press the SET + control and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
5. The indicator light on the
instrument cluster will turn on.
Note:
Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Disengaging speed control
To disengage the speed control:
Depress the brake pedal
Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed.
Resuming a set speed
Press the RESUME control and
release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed. The RESUME control will
not work if the vehicle speed is not
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Increasing speed while using speed control

There are two ways to set a higher
speed:
Press and hold the SET + control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET +
control to operate the Tap-Up
function. Press and release this
control to increase the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
72
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.
Reducing speed while using speed control

There are two ways to reduce a set
speed:
Press and hold the CST - control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the CST -
control to operate the Tap-Down
function. Press and release this
control to decrease the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
Depress the brake pedal until the
desired vehicle speed is reached,
press the SET + control.
Turning off speed control

There are two ways to turn off the speed control:
Depress the brake pedal. This will
not erase your vehicles
previously set speed.
Press the speed control OFF
control.
Note: When you turn off the speed
control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
73
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
RADIO CONTROL FEATURES

Press MEDIA to select AM, FM1,
FM2, TAPE or CD (if equipped).
In Radio mode:
Press SEEK to access the
next/previous strong station.
In Tape mode:
Press SEEK to listen to the next
selection on the tape.
In CD mode:
Press SEEK to listen to the next track on the disc.
In any mode:
Press VOL up or down to adjust
the volume.
Press MUTE to mute the volume.
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a utility compartment.
CELL PHONE USE

The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
74
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
A drivers first responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle.
The most important thing you can do to prevent a crash is to
avoid distractions and pay attention to the road. Wait until it is safe to
operate Mobile Communications Equipment.
POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT (IF EQUIPPED)

To install floor mats that have a retention post:
Position the floor mat so that the
eyelet is over the pointed end of the
retention post and rotate forward to
lock in. Make sure that the mat does
not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator or the brake pedal.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
HOMELINK WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The HomeLink Wireless Control System, located on the drivers visor,
provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held transmitters
with a single built-in device. This feature will learn the radio frequency
codes of most transmitters to operate garage doors, entry gate operators,
security systems, entry door locks, and home or office lighting.
When programming your HomeLink Wireless Control System to
a garage door or gate, be sure that people and objects are out of
the way to prevent potential harm or damage.
Do not use the HomeLink Wireless Control System with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot
detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact
HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 18003553515.
75
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for
future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink equipped vehicle
purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed Homelink buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to
Programming in this section.
Programming
Do not program HomeLink with the vehicle parked in the garage.
Note: Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the
ACC position for programming and/or operation of the HomeLink. It is
also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
1. Press and hold the two outside
buttons releasing only when the
indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not repeat Step 1
to program additional hand-held
transmitters to the remaining two
HomeLink buttons. This will erase
previously programmed hand-held
transmitter signals into HomeLink.
2. Position the end of your
hand-held transmitter 13 inches (28 cm) away from the HomeLink
button you wish to program (located on your visor) while keeping the
indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLink and hand-held
transmitter button. Do not release
the buttons until Step 4 has
been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door
openers may require you to replace
Step 3 with procedures noted in the
Gate Operator and Canadian Programming in this section for Canadian
residents.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Release both
buttons when the indicator light flashes rapidly. (The rapid flashing light
indicates acceptance of the hand-held transmitters radio frequency
signals.)
76
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
5. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink button and observe the
indicator light. If the light is constant, programming is complete and your
device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and
released. Note: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons,
begin with Step 2 in the Programming section do not repeat Step 1.
Note: If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns
to a continuous red, proceed with Steps 6 through 8 to complete
programming of a rolling code equipped device.
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the learn or smart button (usually near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit).
7. Press and release the learn or smart button. (The name and color
of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the HomeLink button. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
again, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other
rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To
program additional HomeLink buttons begin with Step 2 in the
Programming section. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 18003553515.
Gate Operator & Canadian Programming
During programming, your
hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting
not allowing enough time for
HomeLink to accept the signal
from the hand-held transmitter.
After completing Steps 1 and 2
outlined in the Programming
section, replace Step 3 with the following:
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is
advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent
overheating.
77
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button (note Step 3 in the
Programming section) while you press and release every two
seconds (cycle) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency
signal has been accepted by the HomeLink. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink accepts the radio
frequency signal.
Proceed with Step 4 in the Programming section.
Operating the HomeLink Wireless Control System
To operate, simply press and release
the appropriate HomeLink button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, gate
operator, security system, entry
door lock, or home or office lighting
etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or
18003553515.
Erasing HomeLink buttons
To erase the three programmed
buttons (individual buttons cannot
be erased):
Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink buttons until the
indicator light begins to
flash-after 20 seconds. Release
both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step
2 in the Programming section.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink button
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do NOT release the
button.
78
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the HomeLink button, follow Step 2 in the Programming
section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com
or 18003553515.
MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)
With the ignition in the ON position,
the message center, located on your
instrument cluster, displays
important vehicle information
through a constant monitor of
vehicle systems. You may select
display features on the message
center for a display of status preceded by a brief indicator chime. The
system will also notify you of potential vehicle problems with a display of
system warnings followed by an indicator chime.
Selectable features
Reset
Press this control to select and reset functions shown in the INFO menu
and SETUP menu.
Info menu
This control displays the following
options:
Odometer INFO
Distance to Empty
SETUP
Trip Odometer
Average Fuel Economy RESET
Trip Elapsed Drive Time
Display On/Off (top two lines)
79
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Odometer/Trip Odometer
Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Distance to empty (DTE)
Selecting this function from the
INFO menu estimates approximately
how far you can drive with the fuel
remaining in your tank under
normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition OFF
when refueling to allow this feature
to correctly detect the added fuel.
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based
on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not
the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel
economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is
disconnected.
Average Fuel Economy (AFE)
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display your average fuel
economy in 100 miles/gallon or
liters/100 km.
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing gallons of fuel
used by 100 miles traveled (kilometers traveled by liters used), your
figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the RESET control after setting the speed
control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
80
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Trip elapsed drive time
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display your trip elapsed
drive time. When selected the
display will accumulate when the
key is in the ON position.
1. Press the INFO control until the
message center display shows the TRIP TIME XX:XX:XX.
2. Hold the RESET control down for two seconds to clear display.
Display on/off
Select this function from the INFO menu to turn the upper two lines of
the message center display OFF or ON.
Setup menu
Press this control for the following
displays:
Language INFO
Units (English/Metric)
SETUP
System Check
RESET
Language
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current
language to be displayed.
2. Pressing the RESET control

cycles the message center through
each of the language choices.
81
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
3. Press and hold the RESET
control for 2 seconds to set the
language choice.
Units (English/Metric)
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current units
to be displayed.
2. Press the RESET control to
change from English to Metric.
System check
Selecting this function from the
SETUP menu causes the message
center to cycle through each of the
systems being monitored. For each
of the monitored systems, the
message center will indicate either
an OK message or a warning
message for three seconds.
Pressing the RESET control cycles the message center through each of
the systems being monitored.
The sequence of the system check report is as follows:
1. Oil life in XX%
2. Charging system
3. Washer fluid level
4. Brake fluid level
5. Doors and liftgate status
6. Exterior lamps status
7. Traction Control status
8. Tire inflation status
9. Fuel level status (hold to reset to relearn)
10. Distance to empty
82
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicles operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for 4
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of
the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the
RESET control and clearing the warning message.
Warning messages that have been reset are divided into three categories:
They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset.
They will not reappear until an ignition OFF-ON cycle has been
completed.
Warning returns upon another event.
This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within
the vehicle.
Drivers door ajar Warning cannot be reset
Passenger door ajar
Left rear door ajar
Right rear door ajar
Transmission overheated Warning returns after 10
Check traction control (if equipped) minutes
Park brake set
Check brake system
ETC-Engine failsafe mode
Reduce engine power
Stop engine safely
83
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Liftgate ajar Warning returns after the

Check left park lamp ignition key is turned from OFF
Check right park lamp to ON
Check left headlamp
Check fuel cap
Check right headlamp
Check left turn lamp
Washer fluid low
Check right turn lamp
Change oil soon
Check tires
Check brake lamps
Turn signal on reminder
DRIVERS DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the drivers door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the passenger side door is
not completely closed.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the drivers rear door is not
completely closed.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the passenger side rear
door is not completely closed.
LIFTGATE AJAR. Displayed when the liftgate is not completely closed.
TRANSMISSION OVERHEATED. Indicates the transmission is
overheating. This warning may appear when towing heavy loads or when
driving in a low gear at a high speed for an extended period of time.
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine and let it
cool. Check the transmission fluid and level. Refer to Transmission
fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. If the warning
stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer for
transmission service as soon as possible.
PARK BRAKE SET. Displayed when the manual park brake is set. If
the warning stays on after the park brake is released, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM. Displayed when the braking system is not
operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
84
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
REDUCED ENGINE POWER. Displayed when the engine temperature
exceeds safe driving operating range and the vehicle limits engine power
to prevent engine damage.
STOP ENGINE SAFELY. Displayed when the engine temperature
exceeds safe driving operating range and the engine must be shut down
to prevent damage. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and turn off the
engine. If this warning stays on, contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
CHECK BRAKE LAMPS. Displayed when the brake lamps are
activated and at least one is burned out. Check the lamps as soon as
possible and have the burned out lamp replaced. The center high-mount
brakelamp is not monitored.
CHECK LEFT OR RIGHT HEADLAMPS. Displayed when the
headlamps are activated and at least one is burned out. Check the lamps
as soon as possible and have the burned out lamp replaced. Refer to
Replacing headlamp bulbs in the Lights chapter.
CHECK LEFT OR RIGHT PARK LAMPS. Displayed when the park
lamps are activated and at least one is burned out. Check the lamps as
soon as possible and have the burned out lamp replaced.
CHECK LEFT OR RIGHT TURN LAMPS. Displayed when the turn
signals are activated and at least one is burned out. Check the lamps as
soon as safely possible and have the burned out lamp replaced.
CHECK TRACTION CONTROL (if equipped). Displayed when the
Traction Control system is not operating properly. If this warning stays
on, contact your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. For
further information, refer to AdvanceTrac stability enhancement
system in the Driving chapter.
CHECK FUEL CAP. Displayed when the fuel filler cap is not properly
installed. Check the fuel filler cap for proper installation. Refer to Fuel
filler cap in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
CHECK TIRES. Displayed when one or more tires on your vehicle have
low tire pressure. Refer to Inspecting and Inflating Your Tires in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
TURN SIGNAL ON REMINDER. Displayed when the turn signal is
activated and the vehicle is driven more that 0.8 km (1/2 mile).
LOW FUEL LEVEL. Displayed when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at
or near empty.
WASHER FLUID LOW. Indicates the washer fluid reservoir is less than
one quarter full. Check the washer fluid level. Refer to Windshield
washer fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
85
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
CHANGE OIL SOON. Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 5
percent or less. When oil life left is between 5% and 0%, the CHANGE
OIL SOON message will be displayed. When oil life left reaches 0%, the
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message will be displayed.
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center.
USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change
[approximately 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 180 days] perform the
following:
1. Press the SETUP control to
access the System Check function.
2. Press and release the RESET

control to display OIL LIFE XX%
HOLD RESET NEW.

control for 2 seconds to display IF
NEW OIL HOLD RESET.

control to display OIL LIFE SET
TO 100%. Your oil life is now reset.
86
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To reset the oil monitoring system to your personalized oil life %:
1. Press the SETUP control to
access the System Check function.
2. Press and release the RESET

control to display OIL LIFE XX%
HOLD RESET NEW.

control for 2 seconds to display IF
NEW OIL HOLD RESET.
4. Release the RESET control

momentarily, then press RESET and
SETUP controls at the same time to
activate a service mode which will
display OIL LIFE XX% RESET TO
ALTER.
5. Press RESET until you find your personalized OIL LIFE XX%.
6. With your personalized OIL LIFE XX% displayed, press SETUP to
continue the system check.
DATA ERR. These messages indicate improper operation of the vehicle
network communication between electronic modules.
Fuel Computer
Oil life
Charging system
Door sensor
Liftgate sensor
Exterior lamps
Traction control
87
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Washer fluid
Brake Fluid
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible if these messages
occur on a regular basis.
LIFTGATE
Unlock the liftgate (but not release
it) with the power door lock system
and remote entry transmitter.
To open the liftgate, pull the liftgate
handle rearward.
Do not open the liftgate in a
garage or other enclosed area
with a low ceiling. If the liftgate is
opened, the liftgate could be
damaged against a low ceiling.
Do not leave the liftgate open while driving. Doing so could cause
serious damage to the liftgate and its components as well as allowing
carbon monoxide to enter the vehicle.
Make sure that the liftgate door is closed to prevent exhaust
fumes from being drawn into the vehicle. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the
liftgate door open, keep the vents open so outside air comes into the
vehicle.
POWER LIFTGATE (PLG) (IF EQUIPPED)

With this option, you can power open or close the liftgate with the
provided controls.
overhead console button
remote entry transmitter button
outside release handle
liftgate trim-mounted switch (closing)
88
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Opening and Closing the PLG:
The PLG controls will operate without having the key in the ignition. The
transaxle must be in PARK to power operate the PLG, when the key is in
the ignition and turned to the ON position. When the liftgate is being
power closed, a chime will sound three times before the liftgate begins to
power close. A single chime indicates a problem with the close request.
WARNING: Make sure all persons are clear of the power liftgate
area before using the power liftgate controls to open or close the
liftgate.
Keep the keys out of the reach of children. Do not allow children
to play on or near an open or moving power liftgate.
Exercise care, when power opening or closing the PLG in a garage or

other enclosed area with a low ceiling or close to a wall/garage door. The
PLG could be damaged from the contact.
Do not attempt to manually force the PLG to travel faster than the
power system will permit.
When power operating the PLG at temperatures below 32 F (0 C), the
PLG may stop about 5 inches (12.7 cm) from the full open position. The
PLG can be fully opened by pushing it upward to the maximum open
position.
The Power Door Lockout Control is
located in the overhead console.
With the control in the OFF
position, power operation is disabled
from the liftgate handle and from
the liftgate trim switch. The
overhead console switch and remote entry transmitter will operate the
liftgate regardless of the position of the lockout switch.
To power open or close the PLG
from the Overhead console:
1. Press and release the control to
power open the PLG.
2. Press and release the control
again to power the PLG closed.
89
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To power open or close the PLG
with the Remote entry
transmitter:
1. Press this control twice within
three seconds to power open the
PLG. The interior lamps will
illuminate.
2. Press this control another two
times within three seconds to close
the PLG and turn off the interior
lights.
Refer to Remote Entry System in the Locks and Security chapter.
To power open the PLG with
outside release handle:
1. Ensure that the Power Door
Lockout Control in the overhead
console is ON.
2. Ensure that the PLG is unlocked,
using the remote entry transmitter
or power door unlock. Refer to
Remote Entry System in the Locks
and security chapter.
3. Pull up on the liftgate handle to engage the power assist feature.
Release the handle as soon as the PLG begins to power open.
Note: Continued force applied after unlatching may activate the obstacle
detection feature and stop the power system. For the best performance
allow the power system to open the PLG after releasing the handle.
To power close the PLG from the
liftgate trim switch:
1. Ensure the Power Door Lockout
Control is in the ON position.
2. Press and release the control on
the bottom of the liftgate trim panel
to engage the power assist feature.
If a single chime is heard, check to
be sure that the Power Door
Lockout Switch is set to ON and
that the transaxle is in Park.
90
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To operate the PLG manually:
1. Disable the liftgate power function by placing the Power Door Lockout
Control in the OFF position.
2. Open and close the liftgate as you would a standard liftgate.
Note: In case of operation in extreme cold -40 F (-40 C), or on
extreme inclines, manual operation of the liftgate is suggested.
Safety/Obstructions
If anything obstructs the PLG while it is power opening or closing, the
PLG will automatically reverse or stop depending on the position of the
liftgate, provided it meets sufficient resistance. If the PLG encounters an
obstacle while closing, the PLG will reverse to full open. Once the
obstacle is removed, the PLG can be again closed under power. If the
PLG encounters an obstacle while opening, the PLG will stop when it
encounters a solid obstacle. Close the liftgate manually and remove the
obstruction. Normal operation can then be resumed.
Resetting the PLG:
The power liftgate may not operate properly if any of the following
conditions occur:
a low voltage or dead battery
disconnected battery
the liftgate has been left open or unlatched for more than six (6)
hours
If any of these conditions occur, the PLG must be reset. To reset the
PLG:
1. Manually close and fully latch the liftgate.
2. Power open the liftgate by using the remote entry transmitter or
overhead console button.
3. Once the liftgate is fully open, close the liftgate using the power
switch on the liftgate, remote entry transmitter or overhead console
button.
Liftgate ajar signal
If the liftgate is not fully latched, you will receive a LIFTGATE AJAR
message on the instrument panel. If you see this message, check the
liftgate to ensure it is fully latched.
91
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Make sure the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust fumes from

being drawn into the vehicle. If you must drive with the liftgate
open, keep the climate control vents open so that fresh outside air
circulates through the vehicle.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo net (if equipped)

The cargo pouch net secures
lightweight objects in the cargo
area. Attach the net to the anchors
provided. Do not put more than 50
lbs. (22 kg) in the net.
The cargo net is not
designed to restrain objects
during a collision or heavy
braking.
Utility hooks
The utility hooks can be used to
hang small items. Do not hang more
than 20 lb. (12 kg) on each of the
hooks. The hooks are not designed
to restrain objects during a collision.
LUGGAGE RACK (IF EQUIPPED)

Maximum load is 125 lbs (57 kg) on the roof rack structure, or 100 lbs
(45 kg) on the roof panel, evenly distributed. If it is not possible to
distribute the load, position it as far rearward as possible.
92
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To adjust the cross-bar (if equipped) position:
1. Loosen the thumbwheel at both
ends of the cross-bar (both
cross-bars are adjustable).
2. Slide cross-bar to the desired
location and tighten the thumbwheel
at both ends of the cross-bar.
To remove the cross-bar (if equipped) assembly:

1. Loosen the thumbwheel (2) at both ends of the cross-bar (1) and
slide the cross-bar (1) to the end of the side rails (4).
2. Remove the two thumbwheels (2), clamps (3) and cross-bar (1) from
the side rails (4).
To install the cross-bar (if
equipped) assembly:
Note: Ensure that both cross-bars
are installed with the arrow, located
on the bottom of the cross-bar end,
facing towards the front of the
vehicle.
1. Position the cross bar (1) on the
side rails (4) with the arrow facing
towards the front of the vehicle.
2. Align the clamps (3) under the side rails (4) and install the
thumbwheels (2) through the cross bar (1) and side rails (4) into the
clamps (3). Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the other cross-bar.
Note: When the cross-bars are not in use, remove or move the
cross-bars to the back of the roof rack for optimum wind noise.
93
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
KEYS
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. In case of loss, replacement
keys are available from your dealer.
You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case
you require it in an emergency.
Refer to the SecuriLock passive anti-theft system section in this
POWER DOOR LOCKS
Press control to unlock all doors.
Note: When the perimeter alarm is
armed, the power door locks
inhibit state is enabled and this
switch is disabled.
Press control to lock all doors.
Memory lock
If you lock your doors with the power lock switch, the keyless entry
system or the remote entry transmitter while the sliding door is open,
the door will automatically lock after it is closed.
Smart locks (if equipped)
This feature prevents you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if your
key is still in the ignition.
When you open the drivers door and you lock the vehicle with the
power door lock control, all the doors will lock, then the drivers door
will automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the
ignition.
94
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, using the
manual lock button on the door, locking the drivers door with a key, by
simultaneously pressing button 7 8 and the 9 0 controls on the
remote entry keypad (if equipped), or using the lock button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
Childproof door locks

When these locks are set, the
sliding doors cannot be opened
with the inside handle.
The sliding doors can be opened
from the outside when the doors
are unlocked.
The childproof lock controls are
located on front edge of each sliding
door and must be set separately for each door. Setting the lock for one
door will not automatically set the lock for both doors.
Move lock control up to engage the childproof lock feature.
Move control down to disengage childproof lock feature.
If your vehicle is equipped with power sliding door(s), refer to the
Power sliding door section of this chapter for more information on how
the childproof locks operate with this system.
Unlocking the liftgate during a battery failure

In the event of a vehicle power failure affecting the liftgate latch, the
liftgate can be unlocked manually.
1. Locate the liftgate trim access
panel in the center of the liftgate.
2. Using your key, a small
screwdriver or knife, pry off the
access panel.
3. Using your key, a small
screwdriver or knife, poke or cut a
hole in the liftgate door foam as
large as the access window and
move the lock/unlock lever
accordingly:
95
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
For vehicles without power
liftgate, pull the lock/unlock lever
to the right (drivers side).
For vehicles with power liftgate,

pull the lock/unlock lever toward
you (toward the front of the
vehicle).
Once the lock/unlock lever has been
moved, you can open the liftgate
from the outside liftgate handle.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the users authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is
approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could
be caused by:
weather conditions,
nearby radio towers,
structures around the vehicle, or
other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
96
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
3button remote
5button remote
6button remote
The remote entry system allows you to:

lock or unlock all vehicle doors and liftgate without a key.
unlock/open a drivers side power sliding door and/or passenger side
power sliding door (if equipped).
unlock/open the power liftgate (PLG) (if equipped).
activate the personal alarm.
arm and disarm the perimeter anti-theft system (if equipped).
97
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take
ALL remote entry transmitters with you to the authorized dealer in
order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
Unlocking the doors

1. Press and release to unlock the drivers door. Note: The interior
lamps will illuminate and the anti-theft system (if equipped) will disarm.
2. Press and release again within three seconds to unlock all doors
and the liftgate.
Opening/closing power sliding doors (if equipped)

5button remote
6button remote
Press this control twice within three seconds to open the power
sliding door. The interior lamps will illuminate.
Press this control another two times within three seconds to close the
power sliding door and turn off the interior lights.
98
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Opening power liftgate (PLG) (if equipped)
Press the control twice within three seconds to power open the power
liftgate. The interior lamps will illuminate.
Make sure all persons are

clear of the power liftgate
area before using the power
liftgate controls to open or close
the liftgate.
Press the control another two times

within three seconds to close the
power liftgate and turn off the
interior lights.
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is power opening or
closing, the power liftgate will automatically reverse or stop depending
on the position of the liftgate, provided it meets sufficient resistance. If
the power liftgate encounters an obstacle while closing, the power
liftgate will reverse to full open. Once the obstacle is removed, the power
liftgate can be again closed under power. If the power liftgate encounters
an obstacle while opening, the power liftgate will stop when it
encounters a solid obstacle. Close the liftgate manually and remove the
obstruction. Normal operation can then be resumed.
Make sure the power liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust fumes
from being drawn into the vehicle. If you must drive with the
liftgate open, keep the climate control vents open so that fresh outside
air circulates through the vehicle.
For more information regarding the operation of the power liftgate, refer
to Power liftgate (PLG) (if equipped) in the Driver Controls chapter.
Locking the doors

1. Press and release to lock all the doors and liftgate. The parking
lamps will flash once if all doors, the liftgate and the hood (if equipped
with perimeter alarm) are closed and locked.
2. Press and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the
doors and liftgate are closed and locked. Note: The doors will lock again,
the horn will chirp once, and the parking lamps will flash once more.
99
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
If any of the doors, the liftgate or the hood (if equipped with perimeter
alarm) are not properly closed, the horn will make two quick chirps and
the parklamps will not flash.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press to activate the alarm. The alarm will cycle the horn, the turn
signals will flash, and the interior lamps will illuminate.
Press again or turn the ignition to the 4 (ON) or the 1 (ACCESSORY)
position to deactivate.
Replacing the battery
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring. DO
NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER
AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE
FRONT HOUSING OF THE
REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER.
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the

battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery
down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing
cavity.
100
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
5. Snap the two halves back together.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter
should operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost remote entry transmitters
If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed
because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry
transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all
remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for
reprogramming.
How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters
You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four)
available before beginning this procedure.
To reprogram the remote entry
transmitters: 4
3
5
2
1. Ensure the vehicle is electronically unlocked.

2. Put the key in the ignition.
3. Turn the key from the 3 (OFF) position to 4 (ON).
4. Cycle eight times rapidly (within 10 seconds) between the 3 (OFF)
position and 4 (ON). Note: The eighth turn must end in the 4 (ON)
position.
5. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been activated.
6. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.
Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the
procedure over again.
7. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry
transmitter has been programmed.
8. Repeat Step 6 to program each additional remote entry transmitter.
101
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
9. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position after you have finished
programming all of the remote entry transmitters.
10. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been exited.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps illuminate when the key in the drivers door lock
cylinder (if equipped with perimeter alarm), the keyless entry system or
the remote entry transmitter is used to unlock the door(s), power sliding
doors (if equipped) or liftgate.
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
the ignition switch is turned to the 4 (ON) position, or
the keyless entry system or the remote entry transmitter lock control
is pressed, or
after 25 seconds of illumination.
The panel dimmer control must not be set to the off position for the
illuminated entry system to operate.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
they have been turned on with the panel dimmer control, or
any door, power sliding door (if equipped) or the liftgate is open.
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the
last door is closed, even if the panel dimmer control is left on.
Illuminated exit
The interior lights will illuminate when the key is removed from the
ignition.
When the headlamp control is on the sleeping baby mode, only the
lower interior lights will illuminate.
The system automatically turns off after 25 seconds. The panel dimmer
control must not be set to the off position for the illuminated exit to
operate.
Perimeter lamps illuminated entry (if equipped)
The exterior lamps illuminate when the vehicle is unlocked using the
remote entry transmitter, keyless keypad, or the drivers door key lock
cylinder (if equipped with perimeter alarm). The following items will
illuminate:
Puddle lamps
102
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Head lamps
Park lamps
Tail lamps
The system will automatically turn off if:
the vehicle is locked using the remote entry system, the keyless entry
keypad, or
the ignition is turned to the 4 (ON) position, or
after 25 seconds of illumination.
Deactivating/activating perimeter lamps
You may enable/disable this feature by having your vehicle serviced by
your authorized dealer.
You may also perform the following power door lock sequence to
enable/disable the perimeter lamps feature:
1. Turn the ignition to the 4 (ON) position, then press the power door
unlock control 3 times.
2. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position, then press the power door
unlock control 3 times.
3. Turn the ignition to 4 (ON) position. Completing the sequence within
30 seconds enters a program mode and is confirmed by a horn chirp.
Activating or deactivating perimeter lighting once in program mode is
accomplished by:
Pressing the power door unlock control twice within five seconds. At
this point, perimeter lighting will be activated if it was previously
deactivated, and deactivated if it was previously activated.
Confirmation of perimeter lighting being activated is provided by a
short horn chirp followed by a long horn sound; Confirmation of
perimeter lighting being deactivated is provided by a short horn chirp
only.
Exiting the program mode is accomplished by turning the ignition to
any position other than the 4 (ON) position, or two minutes elapsing
since the program mode was entered.
Note: The puddle lamps cannot be deactivated. Performing this
deactivation procedure will only deactivate the head, park and tail lamps.
For information regarding perimeter lamps delay, refer to Autolamps -
Programmable exit delay in the Lights chapter.
Memory feature (if equipped)
The remote entry system allows you to recall the memory seat/side view
mirrors/adjustable pedals feature.
103
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Press to automatically move the driver seat, side view mirrors and
adjustable pedals to the desired memory position.
Associating the remote transmitter with the memory feature
To activate this feature:
1. Position the drivers seat, side view mirrors and adjustable pedals to
the positions you desire.
2. Press the SET control on the
door next to the window inside from
the mirror.
3. Within 5 five seconds, press any
control on the remote transmitter
and then press the 1 or 2 control on
the drivers door panel to associate
with the Driver 1 or Driver 2
positions.
4. Repeat this procedure for another
remote transmitter if desired.
Disassociating the memory feature from the remote transmitter
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press the SET control on the drivers door panel.
2. Within 5 five seconds, press any control on the remote transmitter
which you would like to deactivate and then press the SET control on
the drivers door panel again.
3. Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter if desired.
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to:
lock or unlock the doors without using a key.

activate or deactivate the autolock feature.
open and close the right and left power sliding doors (if equipped).
recall memory seat/side view mirrors/adjustable pedals position Driver
1 or Driver 2 (if equipped).
104
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5digit entry code; this
code is located:
on the owners wallet card in the glove box,
marked on the passenger compartment fuse panel (located below and
to the left of the steering, near the brake pedal),
and is available from your
authorized dealer.
You can also create your own 5digit
personal entry code.
When pressing the controls on the
keypad, press the middle of the
controls to ensure a good activation.
Programming a personal entry code

To create your own personal entry code(s):
1. Enter the factory set code. Note: The drivers door will unlock.
2. Within five seconds press and release the 1 2 on the keypad. Note:
The lock motors will cycle, locked then unlocked.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. Enter a sixth digit if you wish to have the personal entry code recall
memory position Driver 1 or Driver 2 (if equipped with the memory
seat/side view mirrors/adjustable pedals feature). Note: The lock motors
will cycle, locked then unlocked.
Press 1 2 to recall the Driver 1 position.
Press 3 4 to recall the Driver 2 position.
5. After five seconds of keypad inactivity, programming mode is exited.
All of the vehicle doors will lock and unlock to confirm the code has
been stored. Each memory feature driver position (Driver 1 or Driver 2)
can be associated with only one personal code. The factory-set code
cannot be associated with a memory recall position.
You can program up to three personal codes; these codes do not replace
the factory-set code.
105
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Tips for setting codes:
The factory set code cannot be erased or changed.
The factory code will work even after you have set your own personal
codes.
Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
Erasing personal code
1. Enter the factory set 5digit code.
2. Within five seconds of entering the factory code, press and release the
1 2 control. The door locks will lock and quickly unlock to confirm
entry into the programming mode.
3. Within five seconds of Step 2, press and hold the 1 2 for two
seconds to erase the customer programmed code.
The programming mode is exited after five seconds of keypad inactivity.
The door locks will lock and quickly unlock to confirm programming
mode has been exited.
The personal code is now erased and only the factory set 5digit code
will work.
Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry
To unlock the drivers door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. The keyless entry keypad will illuminate after pressing the first
control on the keypad.
To unlock all doors, press the 3 4 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors, press the 7 8 and the 9 0 at the same time. You
do not need to enter the keypad code first. Note: The interior lamps
will turn off.
To open (or close) the power sliding doors (if equipped), press the
5 6 control within five seconds to open (or close) the left power
sliding door or the 9 0 control in order to open (or close) the right
power sliding door.
Autolock
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when:
all doors are closed,
106
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
the ignition is in the 4 (ON) position,
the brake is pressed before reaching 5 mph (8 km/h), and
then the vehicle increases to more than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Relock
The autolock feature repeats when:
an autolock occurrence has already taken place,
the brake is depressed while vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8
km/h),
all vehicle doors become closed again, and
then the vehicle increases to more than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Deactivating/activating the autolock feature
The autolock feature can be enabled or disabled by the keyless entry
keypad (if equipped) on your door, driver configuration mode or by your
authorized dealer.
Deactivating/reactivating the autolock feature using the keypad
(if equipped)
Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature activated. To
deactivate/reactivate this feature:
1. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter the 5-digit entry code.
4. Press and hold the 7 8. While holding the 7 8, press the 3 4.
5. Release the 3 4.
6. Release the 7 8.
The horn will chirp once when the system has been successfully
deactivated.
The horn will chirp twice (one short and one long chirp) when the
system has been successfully reactivated.
To deactivate/reactivate the autolock feature using the power door
unlock control
You must close all the vehicle doors and complete Steps 1-7 within 30
seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure
needs to be repeated, you must wait 30 seconds.
107
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
1. Turn the ignition key to the 4 (ON) position.
2. Press the power door unlock control three times.
3. Turn the ignition key from the 4 (ON) position to the 3 (OFF)
position.
4. Press the power door unlock control three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 4 (ON) position. The horn will chirp.
6. Press the lock control, then press the unlock control. The horn will
chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short and one long
chirp) if autolock was activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position. The horn will chirp once to
confirm the procedure is complete.
SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The
SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is not compatible with non-Ford
aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may result in
vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Theft indicator
The theft indicator is located on top of the instrument panel.
When the ignition is in the 3 (OFF) position, the indicator will flash
once every 2 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is
functioning as a theft deterrent.
When the ignition is in the 4 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for
3 seconds to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the 4 (ON) position. If
this occurs, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for
service.
Key information
Your vehicle is supplied with two coded keys. Only a coded key will
start your vehicle. Spare coded keys may be purchased from an
authorized dealer. An authorized dealer can also program your coded
key, or you can do it yourself. Refer to Programming spare keys in this
chapter.
108
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The following items may prevent the vehicle from starting:
Large metallic objects.
Electronic devices on the key chain that can be used to purchase
gasoline or similar items.
A second key on the same key ring as the coded key.
If any of these items are present, you need to prevent these objects from
touching the coded key while starting the engine. These objects cannot
damage the coded key, but may cause a momentary no start condition
if they are too close to the key when starting the engine. If a problem
occurs, turn the ignition to the 2 (OFF) position and restart the engine
with all other objects on the key ring held away from the ignition key.
Check to make sure the coded key is an approved coded key.
If your keys are lost or stolen, you will need to do the following:
Use your spare key to start the vehicle, or
Have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer or a locksmith. The
key codes will need to be erased from your vehicle and new codes will
need to be re-coded.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly and you may want to store an
extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to prevent
an unforeseen inconvenience.
The correct coded key must be used for your vehicle. The use of the
wrong coded key may lead to a no start condition.
If an unprogrammed key is used in the ignition, it will cause a
no start condition.
Programming spare keys

A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. Only
SecuriLock keys can be used. To program a coded key yourself, you
will need two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already
operate your vehicles engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily
accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure.
If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare coded
key(s) programmed.
Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
109
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
1. Insert the first previously
programmed coded key into the 4
3
ignition and turn the ignition from
the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) 5
position [maintain ignition in 4 (ON) 2
for at least three seconds, but no
more than ten seconds].
2. Turn ignition from the 4 (ON) 1
position back to the 3 (OFF)
position in order to remove the first
coded key from the ignition.
3. Within ten seconds of removing the first coded key, insert the second
previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition
from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position [maintain ignition in
the 4 (ON) position for at least three seconds but no more than ten
seconds].
4. Turn the ignition from the 4 (ON) position back to the 3 (OFF)
position in order to remove the second coded key from the ignition.
5. Within 10 seconds of removing the second coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition and turn the
ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position [maintain
ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least three seconds, but no more
than ten seconds]. This step will program your new key to a coded key.
6. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat this
procedure from step 1.
If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the vehicles engine and the
theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out.
If not successful, the new coded key(s) will not start the vehicles engine
and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat Steps 1
through 5. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer
to have the new spare key(s) programmed.
110
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Locks and Security
PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The perimeter anti-theft system will warn you in the event of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle.
If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are taken to the authorized
dealer to aid in troubleshooting.
Arming the system
When armed, this system will help protect your vehicle from
unauthorized entry. When unauthorized entry occurs, the system will
flash the turn signal lamps and side repeaters and honk the horn.
The system is ready to arm whenever the key is removed from the
ignition. Any of the following actions will prearm the alarm system:
Locking the vehicle using the remote entry transmitter.
Locking the vehicle using the keyless entry keypad.
Pressing the interior power door lock control while the door is open.
Twenty seconds after one of the above events occurs, any door/hood that
is closed is armed.
Any door/hood that is still open is prearmed and waiting for the
door/hood to be closed.
Once that input is closed, the input will arm in 20 seconds and the
exterior lamps may flash.
Disarming the system
You can disarm the system by any of the following actions:
Unlock the vehicle with the remote keyless transmitter.
Unlock the vehicle with the keyless entry keypad.
Unlock the vehicle with a key in the drivers door lock cylinder.
Use a SecuriLock key to move the ignition to the 4 (ON) or 5
(START) position.
111
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING
Notes:
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seats safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of
injury in a collision or sudden stop.
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure

that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback.
After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
Adjustable head restraints (if equipped)

Head restraints help to limit head motion in the event of a rear collision.
Adjust your head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as
possible behind your head.
The head restraints can be moved
up and down.
112
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Push control to lower head restraint.
Adjusting the front manual seat (if equipped)

Never adjust the drivers seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
Lift handle to move seat forward or

backward.
Pull lever up to adjust seatback.
113
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)

Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)

Never adjust the drivers seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring

people in a collision or sudden stop.
Reclining the seatback can reduce the effectiveness of the seats

safety belt in the event of a collision.
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.

Press to raise or lower the front
portion of the seat cushion.
Press to raise or lower the rear

portion of the seat cushion.
114
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Press the control to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
Heated seats (if equipped)

To operate the heated seats:
Push the control located on the
climate control system panel once
to activate high heat.
Push twice to activate low heat.
Push a third time to deactivate.
The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated. For low
heat, 1 light will be lit; for high heat, both lights will be lit.
The heating of the seat turns off after 10 minutes or when the vehicle is
turned off.
Using the manual lumbar support (if equipped)

The lumbar control is located on the
inboard side of the seat under the
armrest.
Rotate the control to change the
firmness of the lumbar support.
Kangaroo pouch and map pocket (if equipped)

The front of the cushion contains a pocket which can be used to hold
small objects that need to be easily accessible. The rear of the seat back
also contains a pocket for larger items which need to be easily
accessible.
115
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Memory seats/sideview mirrors/adjustable pedals (if equipped)
This system allows automatic
positioning of the driver seat,
outside rearview mirrors, and SET
adjustable pedals to two
programmable positions.
The memory seat control is located
on the door next to the window
inside from the mirror.
1 2
To program position one, move
the driver seat to the desired
position using the seat controls. Press the SET control. The SET
control indicator light will briefly illuminate. While the light is
illuminated, press control 1.
To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control
2.
A position can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in
Park. A memory seat position may be programmed at any time.
The memory positions are also recalled when you press your remote
entry transmitter UNLOCK control if the transmitter is programmed to a
memory position or when you enter a valid personal entry code that is
programmed to a memory position.
To program the memory feature to a remote entry transmitter and for
more information on how to use the keypad, refer to Remote entry
system in the Locks and security chapter.
REAR SEATS
Head restraints
Lift the head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as possible
behind your head.
116
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
The head restraints can be moved
up and down by pulling up on the
head restraint.
Push button to lower head restraint.
Seat mounted cup holders (if equipped)

Deploy by pressing the button on
top of the cupholder.
117
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
The cupholder is designed to detach from the seat when subjected to

heavy load. The cupholder can be reinstalled by returning to the closed
position.
Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you
in a collision.
Adjusting 2nd row seats (if equipped)

Lift control to adjust seat forward or backward.
2nd row bucket seat (if
equipped)
118
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
2nd row bench seat (if equipped)
Note: This seat can be moved
forward to keep a child in a
LATCH child restraint attached
to the LATCH anchors at the
center of the bench seat close to
the front seat occupants or to
increase cargo room without
removing the seat. The seat
should be moved to the full
rearward position when it is
occupied by older children or adults, and when child seats are
installed at the seating positions.
Adjusting second row bucket and bench seat back
Pull control forward to adjust seat
back. Using same control will fold
the seat back flat.

119
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Accessing the third row seat with a second row bucket seat
Ensure head restraint is in the full
down position and seat is adjusted
to full rear position (if equipped).
Note: Place the front row seat in a forward position to allow the 2nd
row to be fully upright.
Lift the handle located on the rear
lower corner of the seat.
The seat back will fold flat.
120
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Continuing to lift the handle will
tumble the seat forward, allowing
easier access to the third row seat.
After entering the 3rd row seat,

return the seat from the tumbled
position and latch it to the floor.
Operate recline control to return the

seatback to the upright position.
Note:
Ensure that the seat and seatback
is latched securely in position.
Keep floor area free of objects
that would prevent proper seat
engagement.
Do not adjust or release the seat
floor latch while vehicle is in
motion.
Do not operate the vehicle with seats in tumbled position.
Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether the seat is
occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause injury
during a sudden stop.
121
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)

that cargo or any objects are not trapped underneath the
seatback. After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on
the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether the seat is
occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause injury
during a sudden stop.
Second row bench seat tip slide feature

1. Push the side easy-entry control
handle forward and allow the seat
back to flip forward.
2. Push the seat forward to allow
access to the third row.
After entering the 3rd row, pull back

the seatback until it latches. This
will latch and lock the seatback and
the seat track. The seatback and
seat will not return to their original
position.
Note: Ensure the front row seat is
in a forward position to allow the
seat to return.
122
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Exiting the third row seat
Second row bucket seats (if equipped)
Follow directions for accessing the third row seat
Second row bench seat
To exit the third row, activate the
easy entry system by pulling on the
strap on the rear of the seat. This
will cause the seatback to flip
forward and the seat track latches
to open.
Push the seat forward to allow
easier exit from the third row.
After exiting the third row, push

rearward on the cushion of the seat
to return the seat to its original
position.
Push the seatback rearward until it
latches. This will latch and lock the
seatback and the seat track.

that cargo or any objects are not trapped underneath the
seatback. After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on
the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
Note: Do not attempt to return the seat by pushing on the seatback, as

this will cause the seat tracks to re-lock before the seat can be returned.
Push on the cushion to return the seat.
123
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Removal of second row seats from vehicle
1. Place the front row seat in a forward position to allow the 2nd row
seat to be fully upright.
2. Place the 2nd row seat in a rear position to allow the 2nd row seat to
be fully upright.
3. Place seat in tumbled position.
(See Accessing 3rd row seat)
4. From inside the vehicle, pull up

on front floor release handle.
5. Rotate the seat rearward at a 30

to 45 degree angle.
124
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
6. With the assist handle, pull the
seat rearward.
7. Remove the seat from vehicle.

1. Detach the lap/shoulder belts
from both sides of the seat by
inserting a seat belt tongue or key
into the buckle release slot, pushing
upward as shown, and pulling out
the mini-tongue on the end of the
seat belt.
125
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
2. Find the clips attached near the
ends of the lap/shoulder belts.
3. Clip the end of the belt to the

stationary portion of the shoulder
belt coming out of the trim panel.
The end of the shoulder belt must

be clipped in order to keep it from
striking anything during vehicle
operation.
126
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
4. Position seatback in full down
position.
5. From behind seat pull straight
back on the release handles located
on each side of the seat, releasing
the rear floor latches.
6. Lift up the seat by the release
handles to clear the floor latches
and then pull the seat rearward
until the front hooks have come out
of the floor tubs.
7. Remove the seat.
Installation of second row seats
Second row bucket seats

Prior to installation, ensure that the seats are on the correct side of the
vehicle. Ensure that the seat is positioned so that the seat belt buckle is
near the center aisle of the vehicle. The seatback must be folded flat
prior to installation.
1. Position the seat in vehicle. Place
first row seat in a forward position
to allow the second row seat to be
installed.
127
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
2. Install seat onto rear pin of front
tub at a 30 to 45 degree angle.
3. Rotate the seat forward until it

latches onto the front pin.
4. Rotate seat rearward until the

back of the seat latches onto the
floor.
128
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
5. Operate recline lever and push
the seat back upright.
Ensure seat is latched to vehicle floor by pushing/pulling on seat.

If not latched, the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop.


1. Position the seat in vehicle.
2. Align seat front hooks to the rear
most pins of the front tub.
129
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
3. Lower back of seat onto the rear
tubs until both release controls latch
into place. Be sure that the seat is
locked in place both front and back.
Do not place the seat front hooks on the front most pin of the front tub.
Doing so will not allow the seat to fully install in vehicle.
Stowing the third row seat

1. If the comfort guide is on the
center lap/shoulder belt, slip the
guide off the belt and stow the
guide in the pocket on the back of
the seat.
130
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
2. If you plan to carry very large
objects or items that might damage
the center lap/shoulder belt, detach
the belt from the seat. Use a key or
seat belt tongue to release the
buckle.
3. Store the tongue of the sliding

latchplate in the belt pocket.
131
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
4. Store the belt in the housing
found on the ceiling by inserting the
smaller tongue in the slot provided.
Note: The seat can be stowed with
the safety belt connected if desired.
Store the tongue of the sliding
latchplate in the belt pocket to
avoid potential damage to the seat.
5. Push the head restraint release buttons and move the head restraints
fully down. Remove all objects from the seat and stowage tub.
6. From the rear of the vehicle, fold seat back by pulling and releasing
the number 1 strap.
132
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Important: If you dont let go of
the number 1 strap before the seat
back folds completely, the seat may
not stow flat in the tub. Refer to the
label attached to the rear of the
vehicle seat.
7. Release the cushion latches by pulling the number 2 strap.
133
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
8. Pull the number 3 strap on the seat back to tumble seat all the way in
to the tub in the floor.
Do not use the seat anchors as cargo tie downs.
Unstowing the third row seat

Ensure seat latching area is free of objects.
1. Lift the seat out of the tub in the
floor by pulling up on the exposed
strap or handle. Once seat is at a
vertical position, push the seat over,
letting it fall onto the latches.
134
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
2. To return the seat back to the
seating position, pull the number 1
strap, then while holding the
number 1 strap, pull the number 3
strap to raise the seat back.
3. Release the number 1 strap to
allow the seat to lock, then release
the number 3 strap.
4. Pull up on the head restraints to adjust them.

5. If the center lap/shoulder belt is detached, remove the belt from the
ceiling storage area just ahead of the liftgate opening and buckle the
tongue on the end of the belt to the mini-buckle on the left side of the
center seat.

Third row seat features

The seat is equipped with a recline
function to allow for adjustment of
the seat back for improved comfort.
To activate the recliner, pull and
hold the strap located near the
plastic shield in the center of the
seat. When seat is adjusted to
desired location, release the strap.
135
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)

Tailgate function
The 3rd row seat is equipped with a tailgate function to be utilized when
the vehicle is parked and engine turned off. This rearward-facing position
allows the customer to open the liftgate and sit facing out of the vehicle
rearward.
This is not a position suitable for driving. Do not drive the
vehicle with the seat in this position. The safety belts are not
functional when the seat is in the tailgate position.
Ensure head restraints are moved to their full down position, all seat
belts are released from the seat, seat and stowage tub are free of objects.
1. Push the head restraint release buttons and move all head restraints
fully down.
2. To access the tailgate function,
the seat must be in the seating
position. If the seat is not in the
seating position, follow all the steps
of the Unstowing Seat Section.
Once the seat is in the seating
position, release the cushion latches
by pulling the number 2 strap.
Then, pull the seat rearward by the
number 3 strap and set the seat on
the liftgate scuff plate. The number
1 strap is not used to access this
position.
2
Do not sit on the head restraints.
136
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
3. To return the seat, ensure seat
latching area is free of objects.
Then, raise the seat off the liftgate
scuff plate and push at the top of
the seat back to rotate the seat back
onto the latches. Pull up on the
head restraints to raise them.

SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System
The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating
the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of
occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicles Personal Safety System consists of:
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
Front safety belts with pretensioners, energy management retractors
(first row only), and safety belt usage sensors.
Drivers seat position sensor.
Passenger occupant classification sensor
Front crash severity sensor.
Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.
The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, passenger occupant classification sensor, and indicator lights.
137
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
How does the Personal Safety System work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicles safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a crash, the
RCM activates the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or both
stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System determined
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags are designed
to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions (not rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts) unless the collision causes sufficient
longitudinal deceleration. The pretensioners are designed to activate in
frontal and side collisions, and rollovers.
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints
section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
Drivers seat position sensor
The drivers seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.
Front passenger sensing system
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close
138
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, this occurs
because they are initially sitting very close to the airbag. For other
occupants, this occurs when the occupant is not properly restrained by
seat belts or child safety seats and they move forward during pre-crash
braking. The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary
injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained. Accident
statistics suggest that children are much safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the front.
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back

seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
The passenger occupant classification sensor can automatically turn off

the passenger front airbag. The system is designed to help protect small
(child size) occupants from airbag deployments when they are
improperly seated or restrained in the front passenger seat contrary to
proper child-seating or restraint usage recommendations. Even with this
technology, parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly
restrain children in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the airbag
when the passenger seat is empty to prevent unnecessary replacement of
the airbag after a collision.
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the airbag deployment and
safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Refer to Safety belt section in this chapter.
Front safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupants body
during frontal and side collisions, and rollovers. This maximizes the
effectiveness of the safety belts. In frontal collisions, the safety belt
pretensioners can be activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient
severity, together with the front airbags.
139
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Front safety belt energy management retractors
The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow
webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled
manner in response to the occupants forward momentum. This helps
reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupants chest by
limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Energy management feature
Determining if the Personal Safety System is operational
The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning light section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine
maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not required.
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, driver seat
position sensor, and passenger occupant classification sensor. In addition,
the RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument
cluster. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following.
The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal
Safety System serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Safety belt precautions
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they
can be properly restrained.
140
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always

properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely

to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt

assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2)
Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.

141
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, push the release

button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
All restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts.
While you are fastened in the seat belt, the combination lap/shoulder belt
adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or if
your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the safety
belt will become locked and help reduce your forward movement.
Energy Management Feature Outboard
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management
feature at the front seats to help further reduce the risk of injury in
the event of a head-on collision.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
extend the seat belt webbing in a controlled manner. This helps
reduce the belt force acting on the users chest.
Failure to inspect and replace if necessary the Belt and
Retractor assembly after an accident could increase the risk of
142
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph (8
km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Automatic locking mode
When to use the automatic locking mode

In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat is installed in a
passenger front or outboard rear seating position (if equipped). Children
12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety
seats for children later in this chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode
Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
143
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Ford Motor Company recommends that all passenger safety belt
assemblies and attaching hardware should be inspected by an
authorized dealer after any collision to verify that the automatic
locking retractor feature for child seats is still working properly. Safety
belt assemblies should be inspected according to the procedures in the
Workshop Manual and must be replaced if either damage or improper
operation is noted. Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract

completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments at the front and second
row outboard seating positions.
Adjust the height of the shoulder
belt so the belt rests across the
middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
squeeze and hold the buttons on the
side and slide the height adjuster up
or down. Release the buttons and
pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place.
144
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Third row comfort guide

Note: Before stowing the third row seat or folding the third row seat
back down, the center seat lap/shoulder belt needs to either have the
cross lap tongue stowed in the pocket on the belt or the entire belt
needs to be stowed in the roof.
The safety belt for the 3rd row
center occupant may be stowed in
the ceiling if it has been detached
from the seat to carry large cargo.
Remove the safety belt from the
stowage area on the ceiling and
buckle the small tongue on the end
of the safety belt to the mini-buckle
on the left side of the center seat
position.
The third row center lap/shoulder
belt is equipped with a Belt Comfort
Guide located in a pocket on the
back of the seat. The guide is
attached to the drivers side head
restraint, and is used to adjust the
comfort of the shoulder belt for
smaller occupants in the center
position of the 3rd row seat. To
adjust the comfort guide:
Slip the shoulder belt into the
belt guide.
Slide the guide up or down along the head restraint post so that the
belt is centered on the occupants shoulder.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime

The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
145
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Conditions of operation
If... Then...
The drivers safety belt is not The safety belt warning light
buckled before the ignition illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
switch is turned to the ON warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
position...
The drivers safety belt is The safety belt warning light and
buckled while the indicator warning chime turn off.
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The drivers safety belt is The safety belt warning light and
buckled before the ignition indicator chime remain off.
switch is turned to the ON
position...
BeltMinder
Note: If your vehicle is built without the passenger occupant
classification sensor, the passenger BeltMinder feature is not available.
The BeltMinder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning
lamp in the instrument cluster when the drivers and front passengers
safety belt is unbuckled.
The BeltMinder feature uses information from the passenger occupant
classification sensor to determine if a front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the
BeltMinder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined
by the passenger occupant classification sensor.
Both the drivers and passengers safety belt usages are monitored and
either may activate the BeltMinder feature. The warnings are the same
for the driver and the front passenger. If the BeltMinder warnings have
expired (warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant (driver
or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the
BeltMinder feature.
146
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
If... Then...
The drivers and front The BeltMinder feature will not
passengers safety belts are activate.
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position or less than 1-2
minutes have elapsed since the
ignition switch has been turned
ON...
The drivers or front The BeltMinder feature is activated -
passengers safety belt is not the safety belt warning light
buckled when the vehicle has illuminates and the warning chime
reached at least 3 mph (5 sounds for 6 seconds every 30
km/h) and 1-2 minutes have seconds, repeating for approximately
elapsed since the ignition 5 minutes or until the safety belts are
switch has been turned to buckled.
ON...
The drivers or front The BeltMinder feature is activated -
passengers safety belt becomes the safety belt warning light
unbuckled for approximately 1 illuminates and the warning chime
minute while the vehicle is sounds for 6 seconds every 30
traveling at least 3 mph (5 seconds, repeating for approximately
km/h) and more than 1-2 5 minutes or until the safety belts are
minutes have elapsed since the buckled.
ignition switch has been turned
to ON...
147
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts
(All statistics based on U.S. data):
Reasons given... Consider...
Crashes are rare events 36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to rare events, even for
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
Im not going far 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25
miles (40 km) of home.
Belts are uncomfortable We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable -
try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
I was in a hurry Prime time for an accident.
BeltMinder reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
Safety belts dont work Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
Traffic is light Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
Belts wrinkle my clothes Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
The people Im with dont Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
wear belts times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
148
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Reasons given... Consider...

I have an airbag Airbags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
Id rather be thrown clear Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent
ejection, WE CANT PICK OUR
CRASH.
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the
BeltMinder chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase the
risk of injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the
BeltMinder feature please follow the directions stated below.
One time disable

If at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles
the BeltMinder feature for that seating position, the BeltMinder is
disabled for the current ignition cycle. The BeltMinder feature will
re-enable during the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and
remains buckled for approximately 30 seconds. Confirmation is not given
for the one time disable.
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder feature
The driver and front passenger BeltMinder are
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
Note: The driver and front passenger BeltMinder features must be
disabled/enabled separately. Both cannot be disable/enabled during the
same key cycle.
The driver and front passenger BeltMinder features can be
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
The parking brake is set
149
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)
The ignition switch is in the OFF position
The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled
To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the
BeltMinder feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT
START THE ENGINE)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1
minute)
Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. For the seating position being disabled, at a moderate speed, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt 9 times, ending in the unbuckled state.
(Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.)
After Step 3, the restraint system warning light (airbag light) will be
turned on for three seconds.
4. Within 10 seconds of the light turning on, at a moderate speed, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
This will disable the BeltMinder feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning
light will flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
This will enable the BeltMinder feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning
light will flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds, followed by 3
seconds with the light off, then followed by the restraint system
warning light flashing 4 times per second for 3 seconds again.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, a 9 inch (23 cm) or
12 inch (31 cm) safety belt extension assembly can be added (part
numbers 611C22A and 611C22B respectively). These assemblies can
be obtained from an authorized dealer at no cost.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
150
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt

across the torso.
Safety belt maintenance

Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts, replacing if necessary. All safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters (if equipped), child safety seat tether bracket
assemblies (if equipped), LATCH child seat tether anchors and lower
anchors (if equipped), and attaching hardware, should be inspected after
a collision. Ford recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in
vehicles involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was
minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage
and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced,
except as described in the Replacing the front seat belt assemblies
after a collision section of this chapter. Safety belt assemblies not in use
during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage
or improper operation is noted.
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.
Refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter.

Replacing the front seat belt assemblies after a collision
The front outboard safety belt assemblies have a special energy
management retractors designed to further reduce the risk of injury in
the event of a head-on collision. These retractors should be replaced if
they were used in any accident in which the front airbags deploy. If the
safety belt assemblies are not replaced, there may be increased risk of
injury in the event of a subsequent collision.
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.
151
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
The airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is designed to work in

conjunction with the safety belts to help protect the driver and front
outboard passenger from certain upper body injuries. The term
supplemental restraint means the airbags are intended as a supplement
to the safety belts. Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus
safety belts in impacts for which the airbags are designed to deploy, and
airbags do not offer any protection in crashes for which they do not
deploy.
Important SRS precautions

The SRS is designed to work with
the safety belt to help protect the
driver and right front passenger
from certain upper body injuries.
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a
deploying airbag.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always

properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
152
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)

recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between an occupants chest and the driver airbag module.
Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air
bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:

Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing
objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing
serious injury.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag

supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your authorized
dealer.
Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle

(including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow
hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the
risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.
153
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Children and airbags
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Airbags can kill or injure a
child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?

The airbag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the sensors to close an
electrical circuit that initiates airbag
inflation. The fact that the airbags
did not inflate in a collision does not
mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type
sufficient to cause activation. Front
airbags are designed to inflate in
frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or
rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal
deceleration.
154
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with
a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary
hearing loss. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable
force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who
are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time
of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be
properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function
again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
The SRS consists of:

driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
airbags).
side airbags (if equipped). Refer to Side airbag system later in this
chapter.
one or more impact and safing sensors.
a readiness light and tone.
155
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
diagnostic module.
and the electrical wiring which connects the components.
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag
back up power and the airbag ignitors.
Front passenger sensing system

The front passenger sensing system will turn off the front passengers
frontal airbag under certain conditions. The drivers airbag and side
airbag are not part of the front passenger sensing system. The front
passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front
passengers seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed to detect the
presence of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the front
passengers frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208
and is designed to turn off the front passengers frontal airbag if:
the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in
the front seat,
the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant
seat that is installed according to the manufacturers instructions,
the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturers
instructions,
the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat,
a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of
time,
A smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown child restraints,
or a small adult occupies the front passenger seat.
Even with the front passenger sensing system, children 12 and
under should be properly restrained in the back seat.
156
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
When the front passenger seat is
occupied and the sensing system
has turned off the passengers
frontal airbag, the passenger airbag
off or pass airbag off indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that
the front passenger frontal airbag is
off. When the front passenger seat is
not occupied (empty seat) or in the
event that the front passenger
frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the indicator light will be unlit.
The indicator light is located in the center stack of the instrument panel
to the right of the radio.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front
passengers frontal airbag when a rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. If the child restraint has
been installed and the indicator is not lit, then turn the vehicle off,
remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint
following the child restraint manufacturers directions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the right front passengers frontal airbag anytime the system senses that
a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be
enabled, the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit to remind you that the
airbag is enabled (may inflate).
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the front passengers seat, but the
passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator is lit, it could be that
the person isnt sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, turn the
vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright
position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with
the persons legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the
system to detect that person and then enable the passengers airbag. If
the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, then the occupant should
be advised to ride in the back seat.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, its
very important that they continue to sit upright, with their back against
the seatback, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor while the
vehicle is still in motion. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of
injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or
both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.
157
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined

too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the
decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or
death in a crash. Always sit upright against your seatback, with your
feet on the floor.
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the
passenger airbag is disabled, the pass airbag off light may or may not
be illuminated according to the table below.
Pass Airbag Off
Objects Passenger Airbag
Indicator Light
Empty seat Unlit Disabled
Small (i.e. 3 ring Unlit Disabled
binder, small purse,
bottled water)
Medium (i.e. heavy Lit Disabled
briefcase, fully packed
luggage)
Empty seat, Small or Lit Disabled
medium object with
safety belt buckled
In case there is a problem with the
passenger sensing system, the
airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster will stay lit. DO
NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this Owners Guide.
Any alteration/modification to the front passenger seat may
affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system.
158
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Determining if the system is operational
The supplemental restraint system uses a warning indicator in the
instrument cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the
system. Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
The readiness light (same light
for front and side airbag system)
will either flash or stay lit.
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on.
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Side airbag system (if equipped)

Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front
seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure
to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in
the event of a collision.
Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seat

covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and
increase the risk of injury in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag SRS, its

fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag. See your
authorized dealer.
159
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
All occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety belts
even when an airbag SRS is provided.
How does the side airbag system work?

The design and development of the side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags.
The side airbag system consists of
the following:
An inflatable nylon bag (airbag)
with a gas generator concealed
behind the outboard bolster of
the driver and front passenger
seatbacks.
A special seat cover designed to
allow airbag deployment.
The same readiness airbag light,
electronic control and diagnostic
unit as used for the front airbags.
Two crash sensors located under
the outboard side of the front
seats, attached to the floor.
Side airbags, in combination with
seat belts, can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a
significant side impact collision.
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
the collision will be inflated, even if the respective seat is not occupied.
The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant
to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact
collisions.
The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit
that initiates airbag inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were
160
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designed
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the side airbag has

deployed, the airbag will
not function again. The side
airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and
serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
Safety Canopy system (if equipped)
Do not place objects or

mount equipment on or
near the headliner at the siderail
that may come into contact with a
deploying Safety Canopy. Failure
to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury
in the event of a collision.
Do not lean your head on the door. The Safety Canopy could
injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
161
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Safety Canopy

system, its fuses, the A, B, C or D pillar trim, or the headliner on
a vehicle containing a Safety Canopy. See your authorized dealer.
All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always

wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS and Safety
Canopy system is provided.
To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the

deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy.
How does the Safety Canopy system work?

The design and development of the
Safety Canopy system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy).
The Safety Canopy system
consists of the following:
An inflatable nylon curtain with a
gas generator concealed behind
the headliner and above the doors
(one on each side of vehicle).
A headliner designed to flex open above the side doors to allow Safety
Canopy deployment.
The same readiness airbag light, electronic control and diagnostic unit
as used for the front airbags.
Two crash sensors mounted under the front seats (one on each side).
162
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Two crash sensors located at the c-pillar behind the rear doors (one
on each side).
Rollover sensor in the restraints control module (RCM).
The Safety Canopy system, in combination with seat belts, can help
reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact
collision or rollover event.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the second or third row seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat
because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
The Safety Canopy system is designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the side crash sensor to
close an electrical circuit that initiates Safety Canopy inflation or when
a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor.
The Safety Canopy is mounted to roof side-rail sheet metal, behind the
headliner, along the entire side of the vehicle. In certain lateral collisions
or rollover events, the Safety Canopy system will be activated,
regardless of which seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further
enhance protection provided in side impact collisions and rollover events.
The fact that the Safety Canopy did not activate in a collision does not
mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. The Safety
Canopy is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or
rollover events, not in rear impact, frontal or near-frontal collisions,
unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover.
Several Safety Canopy system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
163
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
If the Safety Canopy system has deployed, the Safety

Canopy will not function again unless replaced. The
Safety Canopy system (including the A, B, C, and D pillar
trim) must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If
the Safety Canopy is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a collision.
Determining if the system is operational

The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following:
The readiness airbag light (same light as for front airbag system) will
either flash or stay lit.
The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system
may not function properly in the event of a collision or rollover event.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles (including
pretensioners)
See your authorized dealer. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified
personnel.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.
and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old
164
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
or younger and who weigh 40 lb. [18 kg] or less) ride in your vehicle, you
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Many states
require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight
years old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When
possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or
child restraint you might use.
Children and safety belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children
who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.
Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the childs face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in
your vehicle.
Child booster seats

Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 lb. (18 kg) and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder
belt will provide some protection, these children are still too small for
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious
injury.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use
of a belt-positioning booster.
165
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better
and more comfortably for growing children.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lb. (36 kg) (about 8 to 12 years old).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?
Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?

Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Types of booster seats

There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your childs head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.
166
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
childs head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with

lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb. (18 kg).
The shoulder belt should cross the chest, resting snugly on the center of
the shoulder. The lap belt should rest low and snug across the hips,
never up high across the stomach.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a childs
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster
seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children
to ride.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
booster seat.
Never put the shoulder belt under a childs arm or behind the
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can

slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a
collision.
167
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Child and infant or child safety seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturers instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
When installing a child safety seat:
Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
Supplemental Restraint System
Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position.
Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure
the tongue is securely fastened in
the buckle.
Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the
safety seat, with the tongue
between the child seat and the
release button, to prevent
accidental unbuckling.
Place seat back in upright position.
LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to 48
pounds (22 kg) in a child restraint. Top tether anchors can be used
for children up to 60 pounds (27 kg) in a child restraint, and to
provide upper torso restraint for children up to 80 pounds (36 kg)
using an upper torso harness and a belt-positioning booster.
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with LATCH and
tether anchors. For more information on top tether straps and anchors,
refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter. For
more information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching safety seats with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments in this
chapter.
168
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Carefully follow all of the manufacturers instructions included

with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden
stop or collision.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder

belts
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use
a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way
back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear

seat whenever possible.
1. Position the child safety seat in a

seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
If you use the 3rd row center seat
and the safety belt has been
detached from the seat to carry
large cargo, remove the safety belt
from the stowage area on the ceiling
and buckle the small tongue on the
end of the belt to the mini-buckle
on the left side of the center seat
position.
169
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and

lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturers instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the

proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
170
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out and a click is heard.
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle and
pull up on the shoulder belt while
pushing down with your knee on the
child seat.
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to

remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward. There should be no
more than one inch of movement for
proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps
two through nine.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
171
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
Children should be placed in the rear in an appropriate child
safety seat that is properly secured to the vehicle.
The tether anchors in your vehicle

are in the positions shown:
The front passenger seat with power adjustment does not have a
tether anchor. The two tether anchors on the back of the second row
bench seat can be used either for child safety seats at the two seating
positions, or either anchor can be used for a single LATCH child seat
installed at the center of the bench seat.
172
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Front passenger seating position (manual adjusting seats only)
1. Position the child safety seat on
the passenger seat cushion.
2. Route the child safety seat tether

strap over the back of the seat. If
the head restraint is adjustable,
route the tether strap under the
head restraint and between the
head restraint posts. If the top of
the safety seat hits the head
restraint, raise the head restraint to
let the child seat fit further
rearward.
3. Grasp the tether strap and

position it to the seat frame.
173
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
4. Rotate the tether hook, and clip
the tether strap to the seat frame.
If the tether strap is clipped

incorrectly (as shown) the
child safety seat may not be
retained properly in the event of a
collision.
5. Rotate the tether strap clip.
6. Install the child safety seat tightly

using the LATCH anchors or safety
belts. Follow the instructions in this
chapter.
174
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
7. Tighten the child safety seat
tether strap according to the
manufacturers instructions.
Rear seating positions

Follow Steps 17 as described above for the following available seats:
2nd row bucket
2nd row bench
3rd row bench
175
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
For additional important safety information on the proper use of safety
belts, child seats and infant seats, please read the entire Seating and
safety restraints chapter in this owners guide.
Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) attachments for child seat anchors
New child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle.
This type of child seat eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach
the child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also
be attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats with
tether straps in this chapter.
Your vehicle has LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the seating
positions marked with the child seat symbol.
If your vehicle has a second row
bench seat, one child seat can be
placed in each outboard seating
position, or one LATCH child
seat can be placed in the center
of the seat only. Please note that
the center-only position does not
have a separate tether anchor.
Either of the outboard tether
anchors may be used for the center
position.
Do not use the two designated
seating positions of the 2nd row
bench when a LATCH child seat is
installed at the center. A child seat
will block access to the safety belt
buckles.
Never attach two LATCH
child safety seats to the
same anchor. In a crash, one
anchor may not be strong enough
to hold two child safety seat
attachments and may break,
causing serious injury or death.
176
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
The lower anchors for child seat
installation are located at the rear
section of the rear seat between the
cushion and seat back.
Follow the child seat manufacturers instructions to properly install a

child seat with LATCH attachments.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the
anchors shown.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash. Adjusting the
seat back angle may allow the tether strap to be tight without lifting the
child seat.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to tilt the child
seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a crash greatly increases.
177
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
New vehicles are fitted with tires
that have a rating on them called
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality
grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
178
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture.
Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tires
load carrying capability.
179
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tires load carrying capability.
kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the drivers door.
B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INSPECTING AND INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to check
pressure of all tires, and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if equipped).
Inflate all tires to the inflation
pressure recommended by Ford
Motor Company.
180
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Inspecting your tires
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove stones, nails, glass or other objects that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from
the tire and make necessary repairs.
Also inspect the tire sidewalls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,
tires that are damaged should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail. Tires can be damaged during off-road use, so
inspection after off-road use is also recommended.
Inflating your tires
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare
(if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly
urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station
gauges may be inaccurate. Ford Motor Company recommends the use of
a digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and
may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or blowout,
with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury.
Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may
result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure

even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label which is located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the drivers door. Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufactures
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
181
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturers recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the drivers door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended
pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10 F (6 C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never bleed or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive. Never bleed or reduce air
pressure when tires are hot.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure with the tire gauge.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure than the other
tires. Check the Safety Compliance Certification Label on the B pillar or
the edge of the drivers door for the recommended spare tire pressure.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
182
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
TIRE REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size
and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause
steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If
you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an authorized
dealer.
Make sure all tires and wheels on the vehicle are of the same size, type,
tread design, brand, load-carrying capacity and speed rating because it
can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
Important: Remember to replace the spare tire when you replace the
road tires on your vehicle. Even if it has never been used, the spare tire
should be replaced because tires degrade over time.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel air valves when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you get a flat tire while driving:
do not brake heavily.
gradually decrease the vehicles speed.
hold the steering wheel firmly.
slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
If your low tire warning light is on, refer to Low tire warning in this
chapter.
The use of tire sealants is not recommended and may damage
your tires. The use of tire sealants may also affect your Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (if equipped).
183
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Temporary spare tire information
Your vehicle may have a temporary spare tire. The temporary spare tire
for your vehicle is labeled as such. It is smaller than a regular tire and is
designed for emergency use only. Replace this tire with a full-size tire as
soon as possible.
Note: The Low Tire Pressure
Warning system (if equipped) will
detect the temporary spare tire and
illuminate the low tire warning light
until the spare tire is replaced with
a proper full-size tire. To reset the system, refer to Low tire warning
Indirect in this chapter.
If you use the temporary spare tire continuously or do not follow
these precautions, the tire could fail, causing you to lose control
of the vehicle, possibly injuring yourself or others.
When driving with the temporary spare tire do not:

use more than one temporary spare tire at a time
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) or drive further than 2,000 miles (3,200
km) total under any circumstances
load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
tow a Class III trailer
use tire chains
drive through an automatic car wash, because of the vehicles reduced
ground clearance
try to repair the temporary spare tire or remove it from its wheel
use the wheel for any other type of vehicle
Use of a temporary spare tire at any one wheel location can lead to
impairment of the following:
handling, stability and braking performance
comfort and noise
ground clearance and parking at curbs
Winter driving capability
184
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information (if equipped)
Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A

dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for temporary
use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should replace it as
soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size and type as
the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford. If the
dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
Use commercial car washing equipment
Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to impairment of the
following:
Handling, stability and braking performance
Comfort and noise
Ground clearance and parking at curbs
Winter weather driving capability
Wet weather driving capability
All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional caution
should be given to:
Towing a trailer
Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a dissimilar spare tire/wheel and seek
service as soon as possible.
185
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Location of the spare tire and tools
The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following
locations:
Item Location
Spare tire Under the vehicle, just forward of
the rear bumper.
Jack Behind the access panel located
on the right rear quarter panel
interior trim.
Jack handle Attached to the jack with a clip.
Flat tire tether, wing screw Inside tire tether kit, next to jack.
Jack extension tool (cargo van Attached to the jack kit.
model only)
Removing the jack and tools
1. Locate the access panel on the interior trim. Rotate the panel
retaining clip and remove the panel.
2. Remove the jack and lug nut wrench by turning the thumbscrew
counterclockwise to relieve tension against the stowage bracket.
Removing the spare tire
1. Wagon only: Open liftgate and
lift flap in the carpeting on the rear
tub cargo floor to expose the hex
nut. Insert the lug nut wrench on
the hex nut in cargo floor.
Cargo van only: Lift flap in mat to
expose hex nut. Insert extension
tool through access hole and engage
hex nut. Place lug wrench onto end
nut of extension tool.
186
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
2. Turn the wrench
counterclockwise until cable is slack
and tire can be slid rearward.
3. Remove the primary retainer from
the center of the tire.
Note: Do not stow the full size tire or any flat tire under the vehicle.
Stowing the primary tether
Note: If no tire is to be stowed
under the vehicle, raise the primary
tether by turning the wrench
clockwise until the hex nut ratchets.
Tire change procedure

When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transaxle
alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the
jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park).
To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire,
be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions)
the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the
vehicle) to the tire being changed.
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be
seriously injured.
187
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
1. Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and set parking
brake.
2. Place gearshift lever in P (Park),

turn engine off, and block the
diagonally opposite wheel.
3. Remove the spare tire, jack and
lug wrench.
4. Removing the optional wheel

cover or center ornament:
To remove a bolt-on wheel cover
(if equipped) loosen the plastic
nuts on the center ornament with
the wheel nut wrench. Then,
remove the wheel cover with the
tapered end of the wheel nut
wrench.
Remove the center ornament (if
equipped) from the wheel with the tapered end of the wheel nut
wrench. Insert and twist the handle, then pry against the wheel.
5. Loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the wheel
is raised off the ground.
188
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
If Ford Accessory Running Boards
have been installed, use the jack
adapters supplied with the running
boards as described on the inside of
the jack storage area.
6. Locate the jack notch next to the
door closest to the tire you are
changing, then place the jack on the
frame rail directly behind the notch.
7. Turn the jack handle clockwise

until the wheel is completely off the
ground.
To lessen the risk of
personal injury, do not put
any part of your body under the
vehicle while changing a tire. Do
not start the engine when your
vehicle is on the jack. The jack is
only meant for changing the tire.
8. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.

9. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub.
Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
10. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
189
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
11. Remove the jack and fully 1
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown. Refer to Wheel lug nut
torque specifications later in this
chapter for the proper lug nut 3 4
torque specification.
12. Installing the optional wheel
cover or center ornament: 5 2
If equipped with a bolted-on
wheel cover, install the wheel
cover and tighten the five plastic nuts until they click (do not use
power tools on these nuts).
If equipped with the center ornament, install the center ornament by
snapping it back into place.
13. Put flat tire, jack and lug wrench away in the proper stowage
locations.
Stowing the flat and full-size tire
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Do not install the flat tire or any full size tire underneath the
vehicle.
Remove tether kit from the jack storage area.
Wagon only:
1. Place tire upright inside the vehicle near the rear of the vehicle with
the valve stem facing the front of the vehicle.
2. Pass the cable retainer through the center of the wheel.
3. Raise the tire and secure both ends of the cable with the wing nut
provided in the tether cable kit, by installing it on the luggage back panel
and turning the wing screw clockwise. You will hear an audible click
when the tire is properly secured.
4. Check that the flat tire is properly secured.
Cargo van only:
1. Remove the perforated section of the vinyl mat in the center floor
area in order to install the wing screw.
2. Using the tether cable kit located with the jack, pass the cable retainer
through center of the wheel.
3. Lay the tire flat and secure the cable with wing screw by installing it
on the wing screw retainer in the floor and turning the wing screw
clockwise. You will hear an audible click when the tire is properly
secured.
190
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
4. Check that the flat tire is properly secured.
Stowing the spare tire
1. Lay the spare, inflated tire on the ground with the valve stem facing
down.
2. Insert the primary wheel retainer through the center of the wheel.
3. Use the winch mechanism to pull, and raise the tire under the vehicle.
4. Wagon only: Raise the tire by turning the lug nut wrench clockwise
until the hex nut ratchets.
Cargo van only: Raise the tire by turning the jack extension tool
clockwise with the lug nut wrench until the hex nut ratchets.
The effort to turn the jack handle increases significantly and the spare
tire carrier ratchets or slips when the tire is raised to the maximum
tightness. Tighten to the best of your ability, to the point where the
ratchet/slip occurs, if possible. The spare tire carrier will not allow you to
overtighten. If the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips with little effort,
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer for assistance at your earliest
convenience.
5. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly
tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it will not
move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the
spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire.
NOTE: Visually check to make sure the wheel plate is resting flat against
the tire.
6. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six months, per Scheduled Maintenance Guide), or at
any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other
components.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km)
after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque*
lb.ft. Nm
12 x 20 100 135
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
191
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or

foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel
or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that
contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to
the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal
contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to
loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion,
resulting in loss of control.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized
information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and
in case of a recall.
Information on P type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tires ratio of height to
width.
192
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
4. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tires load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owners Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tires speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M 81 mph (130 km/h)
N 87 mph (140 km/h)
Q 99 mph (159 km/h)
R 106 mph (171 km/h)
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
U 124 mph (200 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
W 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240
km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with
a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
193
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
drivers door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (112) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
194
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturers recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the drivers door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for LT type

tires
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below:
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tires
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the rear axle (a
total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
195
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Information on T type tires
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tires ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the drivers door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading with and without a trailer section.
196
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
TIRE CARE
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can also cause tires to wear
abnormally. Here are some of the important maintenance items:
Tire wear
Measure and inspect the tire tread on all your tires periodically.
Advanced and unusual tire wear can reduce the ability of tread to grip
the road in adverse (wet, snowy, etc.) conditions. Visually check your
tires for uneven wear, looking for high and low areas or unusually
smooth areas. Also check for signs of tire damage.
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to prevent your vehicle
from skidding and hydroplaning.
Built-in treadwear indicators, or
wear bars, which look like narrow
strips of smooth rubber across the
tread will appear on the tire when
the tread is worn down to 1/16th of
an inch (2 mm). When the tire tread
wears down to the same height as
these wear bars, the tire is worn
out and should be replaced.
Inspect your tires frequently for any
of the following conditions and
replace them if one or more of the
following conditions exist:
Fabric showing through the tire
rubber
Bulges in the tread or sidewalls
Cracks or cuts on the sidewalls
Cracks in the tread groove
Impact damage resulting from use
Separation in the tread
Separation in the sidewall
Severe abrasion on the sidewall
If your vehicle has a leak in the exhaust system, a road tire or the spare
tire may be exposed to hot exhaust temperatures requiring the tire to be
replaced.
197
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
Observe posted speed limits
Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
Avoid potholes and objects on the road
Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not rapidly
spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an
explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
Never spin the tires in excess of the 35 mph (55 km/h) point
indicated on the speedometer.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive theres always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when youre driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
198
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will
help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life. Unless otherwise specified, rotate the tires approximately
every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
199
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive
(4WD)/ All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.

Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
LOW TIRE WARNING INDIRECT (IF EQUIPPED)

The low tire warning system is designed to detect a significant loss of
inflation in any one of your tires on your vehicle. The system uses the
Anti-lock brake wheel speed sensors to detect a change in wheel speed
due to tire deflation.
200
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
When a tire loses inflation, the low
tire warning system detects the
change and illuminates the low tire
warning indicator light as shown.
If the light remains on while driving,
check the tire pressure refer to Checking the tire pressure in this
chapter. The low tire warning indicator light will also illuminate when
using a temporary spare, refer to Changing the tires in the Roadside
emergencies chapter.
The low tire warning system may not detect an under-inflated
tire under all conditions and is not a substitute for manually
checking tires regularly for proper inflation.
When to RESET the Low Tire Warning System:

after any of the following
Tire rotation
One or more tires have been replaced
Tire balancing
Wheel alignment
Adjusting the pressure on one or more tires (note: tire pressures are
often adjusted during oil change service)
Inflating a low tire will not clear the Low Tire Warning indicator light.
Only resetting the system will clear the light.
The system will not detect a pressure loss without driving the vehicle
for at least 0.5 mile (0.8 km) at speeds greater than 25 mph (40
km/h).
Reset without message center:
To reset turn the ignition to the ON
position, depress and Trip/odometer
button (located in the instrument
cluster) until TIRE RESET or
CHECK TIRE AND RESET is
displayed in the odometer display window. Once TIRE RESET or
CHECK TIRE AND RESET is displayed, press and hold the button for
three seconds. The low tire warning indicator light will flash three times
as the low tire warning system begins to initialize.
201
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Reset with message center:
To reset turn the ignition to the ON
position, press the set up button on
the message center until SYSTEM
CHECK is displayed. Press the
RESET button until HOLD RESET
TO RELEARN is displayed, continue to hold the button for three
seconds. The low tire warning indicator light will flash three times as the
low tire warning system begins to initialize.
The system normally requires 15 to 20 minutes of driving in each of
three speed ranges to learn how the tires behave after the system has
been reset. However, the system will become functional in each speed
range as soon as learning completes in each individual speed range.
Speed ranges:
Low 2542 mph (4068 km/h)
Medium 4262 mph (68100 km/h)
High above 62 mph (100 km/h)
This system may not function properly under the following conditions:
Uneven tread wear.
Driving on loose or low traction surfaces such as gravel, snow or slush.
Using tire chains
Initial tire pressures out of specified range.
Two or more under inflated tires.
Sudden loss of tire pressure.
Vehicle speeds less than 20 mph (30 km/h), greater than 70 mph (120
km/h) or driving duration less than 10 miles.
Transporting a heavy load or towing a trailer.
A different tire was replaced and was not the same brand, type, size,
speed rating, load carrying capacity and DOT code as the other tire on
the same axle.
System was not reset after tire rotation, air pressure adjustment, a tire
change, wheel alignment or tire balancing.
System was not reset after the ABS warning lamp illuminates.
The low tire warning feature can be turned off by your authorized dealer.
202
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you
currently have on your vehicle.
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
Use only cable type SAE Class S chains. Conventional link or other
type chains may cause damage to your vehicles wheelhouse and/or
underbody.
These cable type chains should only be applied to the front wheels.
Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and chains.
VEHICLE LOADING WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicles weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicles
Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
203
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the

vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the drivers door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb. for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by
payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once
you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add
more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly
loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
204
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Example only:
Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
205
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the drivers door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label axle weight
rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or
performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in

this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +

passengers.
206
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
The GVWR is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label located on the B-Pillar or
The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR.
Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle

weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling
or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) is the weight of the loaded vehicle

(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and
passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicles braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe
control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing
vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The
GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
207
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
1015% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 1525% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities

than the originals because they may lower the vehicles GVWR
and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the
originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in

serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:

1. Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicles placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
208
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
Another example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400
(5 x 220) (5 x 30) = 1400 1100 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg (5
x 99 kg) (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 495 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
A final example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100
lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 (2 x 220) (12 x
100) = 1400 440 1200 = 240 lb. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg (2 x 99 kg) (12 x 45 kg) = 635
198 540 = 103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at
least 240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags,
then the load calculation would be:
1400 (2 x 220) (9 x 100) = 1400 440 900 = 60 lb. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. .
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg (2 x 99 kg) (9
x 45 kg) = 635 198 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the drivers door.
209
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
TRAILER TOWING
Your vehicle is capable either of towing Class I trailers or up to Class II
trailers when equipped with the optional trailer tow package.
If your vehicle does not have the optional trailer tow package your
vehicle is partially prepped for trailer tow lamp wiring but you will also
need to install electrical kit 3F2Z-15A416-A. This kit contains fuses and
relays to isolate the vehicle lighting circuitry from the trailer lighting and
an adapter wiring harness containing the standard 4-pin trailer plug.
Refer to the Trailer lamps section in this chapter for additional
information. Do not tow above 2,000 lb. (907 kg) without the
manufacturer-installed trailer tow package.
If your vehicle has the optional trailer tow package it comes with heavy
duty cooling fans, auxiliary transmission fluid cooler, an auxiliary engine
oil cooler (4.2L engine only), heavy duty battery, trailer tow wiring
(including fuses and relays to isolate the vehicle lighting circuitry from
the trailer lighting) and a kit (in a cardboard box) that includes an
adapter wiring harness that contains the standard 4-pin trailer plug.
Trailer towing puts additional loads on your vehicles engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires, and suspension. For your safety and to
maximize vehicle performance, be sure to use the proper equipment
while towing.
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing procedure:
Stay within your vehicles load limits. If exceeded, cargo should be
removed from the trailer and/or the vehicle until all weights are within
specified limits.
Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing. Refer to Preparing to
tow in this chapter.
Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing. Refer to Driving
while you tow in this chapter.
Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. Refer to
Special Operating Conditions in the scheduled maintenance
information.
Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 500
miles (800 km).
Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the
proper installation and adjustment specifications.
210
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Vehicle towing capability/Trailer

Trailer
hitch requirement
Trailer
GCWR
Hitch type Weight
Model/Engine - lb. Tongue load
required range - lb.
(kg)
(kg)
Van, 3.9L 7000 Class I 1015% of
Wagon, 3.9L (3175) Non-Equalizing 0-2000 TW (200 lb.
7200 Weight (0907) [91 kg]
Wagon, 4.2L
(3266) Carrying maximum)
Wagon, 3.9L
8500
with trailer Class II 1015% of
(3856)
tow option Non-Equalizing 03500 TW (350 lb.
Wagon, 4.2L Weight (0-1588) [159 kg]
8700
with trailer Carrying maximum)
(3946)
tow option
Do not exceed the maximum loads listed on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. For load specification terms found on the label, refer
to Vehicle loading in this chapter. Remember to figure in the tongue
load of your loaded trailer when figuring the total weight.
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of control
and personal injury.
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance.
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle bumper. Use a load
carrying hitch that does not exceed your vehicles capability. See the
Tongue Load section in the trailer towing chart earlier in this section for
range details on a specific trailer load.
211
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Safety chains
Always connect the trailers safety chains to the hook retainers on the
hitch. To connect the trailers safety chains, cross the chains under the
trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Be sure your trailer conforms to all applicable local and Federal
Regulations regarding trailer braking. If your trailer is equipped with
electronically controlled brakes you will need to have an electronic brake
controller with associated wiring installed to your vehicle by an
authorized dealer.
Do not connect a trailers hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicles brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working.
Do not splice into the vehicle lamp wiring for trailer lamps. Your
vehicle uses an advanced electronic module to control and
monitor your vehicle lamps. Splicing into the wiring or attaching
wiring to the vehicle bulb. may DISABLE the rear vehicle lamps
or cause them not to function properly. Your lamp outage feature
may also be disabled or provide incorrect information.
See your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper
instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps.
212
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist
in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4speed automatic
transmission in the Driving chapter.
Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance
Information for more information.
Trailer towing tips
Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do
not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become
less effective.
The trailer tongue weight should be 1015% of the loaded trailer
weight.
After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park).
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailers wheels.
213
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to tow
your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (such as behind a
recreational vehicle).
These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not
damaged due to insufficient lubrication.
All Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles:
It is not recommended to tow front wheel drive vehicles with the front
drive wheels on the ground. It is recommended to tow your vehicle with
the drive wheels on a dolly or two wheel car hauling trailer.
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access
to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer or flatbed transport vehicle) your
vehicle can be flat towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following
conditions:
Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).
214
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driving
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to 4
3
operate while the engine is not
running. 5
2. LOCK, locks the steering wheel, 2
automatic transmission gearshift
lever and allows key removal.
3. OFF, shuts off the engine and all 1
accessories without locking the
steering wheel. This position also allows the automatic transmission shift
lever to be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal
being depressed.
When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF position, the
automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted
vehicle movement, always set the parking brake.
4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key

position when driving.
5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the accelerator
before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have
difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the
vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter.
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk
of fire or other damage.
215
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driving
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed

areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in
this chapter for more instructions.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions

When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts. For more
information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
3. Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
4. Make sure the parking brake is

set.
216
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driving
Turn the key to 4 (ON) without
turning the key to 5 (START).
4
3
5
2
Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate or illuminate briefly. If a

light fails to illuminate, have the vehicle serviced.
If the drivers safety belt is fastened, the light may not illuminate.
Starting the engine

Note: Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter.
217
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driving
1. Turn the key to 5 (START)
without pressing the accelerator 4
3
pedal and release as soon as the
engine starts. The key will return to 5
4 (ON). 2
2. When the engine starts, release
the key.
1
Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,
turn the key to 3 (OFF), wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still
fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will
allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is
flooded with fuel.
Using the engine block heater (if equipped)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and heater/defroster performance. Use of an engine block heater is
strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach
-10F (-23C) or below. For best results, plug the heater in at least three
hours before starting the vehicle. The heater can be plugged in the night
before starting the vehicle.
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.
Guarding against exhaust fumes

Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information

If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
218
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driving
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Brake system warning
light in the Instrument Cluster ! P
chapter for information on the brake
system warning light. BRAKE
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the
brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is
done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal
characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
when the ignition is turned on. If ABS
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
normal braking is still effective. (If ! P
your BRAKE warning lamp
illuminates with the parking brake BRAKE
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately.)
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicles stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated if wheelslip or skidding is detected,
optimizing your stopping distance and allowing you to retain steering
control.
219
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driving
Brake Assist (if equipped as part of the AdvanceTrac system)
The Brake Assist system provides full braking force during panic braking
situations. It detects a rapid application of the brake pedal and
maximizes the amount of brake booster assist, helping the driver to
achieve maximum braking pressure. Once a panic brake application is
detected, the system will remain activated as long as the brake pedal is
depressed. The system is deactivated by releasing the brake pedal.
When the system activates, the brake pedal will travel with very little
effort; this is normal.
Parking brake
To set the parking brake, pull the
handle up as far as possible. The
BRAKE warning lamp will illuminate
and will remain illuminated until the
parking brake is released.
To release, press and hold the
button, pull the handle up slightly,
then push the handle down.
Always set the parking
brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely ! P
latched in P (Park).
BRAKE
ADVANCETRAC STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
The AdvanceTrac system helps the driver maintain the stability and
steer-ability of the vehicle. The system integrates anti-lock braking
system (ABS) and Traction Control and a more advanced function to
further enhance the stability of the vehicle.
AdvanceTrac constantly monitors the vehicle motion relative to the
drivers intended course. This is done by using added sensors that
compare the steering inputs from the driver with the actual motion of
the vehicle. AdvanceTrac determines whether an engine torque
reduction or brake application is needed to help control the vehicle. If
the vehicle begins to rotate excessively left or right, spin out, or slide
sideways, the system will attempt to correct the excessive motion. If the
220
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driving
vehicle does not respond to steering inputs, the system will attempt to
increase the turning response of the vehicle.
AdvanceTrac enhances your vehicles stability during maneuvers that
require all available tire traction, like in wet/snowy/icy road conditions
and/or when performing emergency maneuvers. In an emergency
lane-change, the driver will experience better overall vehicle traction,
and have better control of the vehicle.
Driving conditions which may activate AdvanceTrac include:
Accelerating on a slippery surface
Taking a turn too fast
Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
Hitting a patch of ice
Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road
Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice
versa
Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa
Hitting a curb while turning
Cornering at excessive speeds while towing a heavily loaded trailer
(refer to Trailer Towing in this chapter)
The AdvanceTrac system automatically turns on when the engine is
started. However, the system does not function when the vehicle is
traveling in R (Reverse).
If you are operating the speed control system and road conditions
change causing the AdvanceTrac to activate, the AdvanceTrac will
disengage the speed control. When driving conditions permit, you can
return to speed control by pressing RESUME. Refer to Speed control in
the Driver controls chapter.
The AdvanceTrac button allows the
driver to control the availability of
the AdvanceTrac system.
AdvanceTrac system status is
indicated by the TRAC OFF
indicator light in the instrument
cluster when the system is
deactivated.
If a failure is detected in the AdvanceTrac system, the TRAC OFF
indicator light in the instrument cluster will stay on. Vehicle equipped
221
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driving
with a message center will also have CHECK ADVANCETRAC shown in
the display. Have the vehicle system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately.
If the vehicle is stuck in snow or mud or when driving in deep sand,
switching off the AdvanceTrac system may be beneficial so the wheels
are allowed to spin. If your vehicle seems to lose engine power while
driving in deep sand or very deep snow, switching off the AdvanceTrac
stability enhancement feature will restore full engine power and will
enhance momentum through the obstacle.
Some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake pedal when the
AdvanceTrac performs a system self-check. During AdvanceTrac
operation you may experience the following:
A rumble or grinding noise
A slight deceleration of the vehicle
The TRAC ACTIVE indicator light will illuminate
If your foot is on the brake pedal, you will feel a vibration in the
pedal.
If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the
brake pedal will move to apply higher brake forces. You may also hear
a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during this severe
condition.
All these conditions are normal during AdvanceTrac operation.
If the AdvaceTrac system is activated for an extended period of time, the
brake portion of the system will shut down to allow the brakes to cool
down. A limited AdvanceTrac function using only engine power
reduction will still help control the wheels from over-spinning. When the
brakes have cooled down, the system will again function normally.
Anti-lock braking is not affected by this condition and will function
normally during the cool-down period.
Do not alter or modify your vehicles suspension or steering; the
resulting changes to the vehicles handling can adversely affect
the AdvanceTrac system. Also, do not install a stereo
loudspeaker near the front center console or under either front
seat. The speaker vibrations can adversely affect the
AdvanceTrac sensors located in this area.
Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose
control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal
injury or property damage. The occurrence of an AdvanceTrac event
is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their
ability to grip the road; this may lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If you
experience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.
222
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driving
STEERING
To prevent damage to the power steering system:
Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump reservoir
fluid level (below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
an improperly inflated tire
uneven tire wear
loose or worn suspension components
loose or worn steering components
improper steering alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OPERATION
Brake-shift interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the 4 (ON) position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with the ignition
in the 4 (ON) position and the brake pedal depressed:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Insert the key and turn it to the 3
(OFF) position. Apply the brake 4
3
pedal and shift to N (Neutral).
5
2
223
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driving
When the key is in the 3 (OFF) position, the automatic

transmission shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position
without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always set the parking brake.
3. Start the vehicle.

If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicles brakelamps are not
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your authorized dealer.
Driving with an automatic overdrive transaxle with column

gearshift
Your transaxle is equipped with an adaptive learning strategy found in
the vehicle computer. This feature is designed to increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life of the vehicle. A new vehicle or
transaxle may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered
normal and will not affect function or durability of the transaxle. Over
time, the adaptive learning process will fully update transaxle operation.
Additionally, whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery
installed, the strategy must be relearned.
Your automatic overdrive transaxle provides fully automatic operation in
either D (Drive) or 3. Driving with the gearshift lever in D (Drive) gives
the best fuel economy for normal driving conditions. For manual control
start in 1 (First) and then shift manually.
To put your vehicle in gear, start the engine, depress the brake pedal,
then move gearshift lever out of P (Park). Once you place the gearshift
lever securely into position, gradually release the brake pedal and use
the accelerator as necessary.
224
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driving
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4speed automatic
transaxle
P (Park)
This position locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
Start the engine
Depress the brake pedal
Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
Come to a complete stop
Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive) with Overdrive
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. The transaxle
operates in gears one through four.
3 (Third)
This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.
Provides more engine braking than D (Overdrive).
Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from D
(Overdrive) to other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy
loads, trailer towing and when engine braking is required.
225
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driving
1 (First)
Transaxle operates in first gear only.
Provides maximum engine braking.
Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
When parking, do not use the gearshift in place of the parking
brake. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the
gearshift is securely latched in Park (P). Turn off the ignition
whenever you leave your vehicle. Never leave your vehicle unattended
while it is running. If you do not take these precautions, your vehicle
may move unexpectedly and injure someone.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If necessary, try turning the Traction Control or AdvanceTrac system
off. This will allow the wheels to spin, which may help to free your stuck
vehicle. For more information, refer to Traction Control (if equipped)
or AdvanceTrac stability enhancement system (if equipped) in this
chapter.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the
limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this
section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and
fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking
speeds. Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS;
this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
226
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driving
To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in R

(Reverse) and when using the RSS.
This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or

moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to
assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging
the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches, bike or

surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps.
The RSS detects obstacles up to 6

ft. (2 meters) from the rear bumper
with a decreased coverage area at
the outer corners of the bumper,
(refer to the figures for approximate
zone coverage areas). As you move
closer to the obstacle, the rate of
the tone increases. When the
obstacle is less than 10 inches (25.0
cm) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the
side of the vehicle, the tone will
sound for only three seconds. Once
the system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.
227
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Driving
The RSS is automatically enabled
when the gear selector is placed in OFF
R (Reverse) and the ignition is ON.
The park aid disable switch allows
the driver to disable the RSS only
when the ignition is ON, and the
gear selector is in R (Reverse). The
OFF indicator remains illuminated
when the system is disabled. If the
indicator light illuminates when the RSS is not turned off, it may indicate
a failure in the RSS.
The system defaults to enabled every time the ignition is turned on.
Press the control to disable or enable the system.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom of the hubs (for trucks) or the
bottom of the wheel rims (for cars). When driving through water,
traction or brake capability may be limited. Also, water may enter your
engines air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may
stall. Driving through deep water where the transmission vent
tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and
cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
228
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
24hours, seven days a week
for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of three years or 36,000
miles (60,000 km), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury
vehicles, and four years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km) on Lincoln
vehicles.
Roadside assistance will cover:
a flat tire change with a good spare (except Ford GT which has a tire
inflation kit)
battery jump start
lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customers
responsibility)
fuel delivery (2.0 gallons [7.5L], maximum two occurrences within 12
month period)
towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest authorized dealer, or
your selling authorized dealer if within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the
nearest authorized dealer (one tow per disablement). Even
non-warranty related tows, like accidents, are covered (some
exclusions apply, such as impound towing or repossession).
Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for
information on:
coverage period
exact fuel amounts
towing of your disabled vehicle
emergency travel expense reimbursement
travel planning benefits
USING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,
call 18002413673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 18005214140.
229
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
18006652006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call
1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 18005214140.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
18006652006.
ROADSIDE COVERAGE BEYOND BASIC WARRANTY

In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting
your authorized dealer.
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warrantys Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
18772942582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL

The hazard flasher is located on the
instrument panel by the radio. The
hazard flashers will operate when
the ignition is in any position or if
the key is not in the ignition.
Push in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again to turn them off. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH

This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch
may have been activated.
230
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
This switch is located behind the
service panel on the right side of
the cargo area.
To reset the switch:
1. Turn the ignition OFF.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the
switch by pushing in on the reset
button.
4. Turn the ignition ON.
5. Wait a few seconds and return
the key to OFF.
6. Make another check for leaks.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate 15
fuses before replacing any electrical

components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
231
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Cartridge
Fuse Mini Standard Maxi Fuse link
maxi
rating fuses fuses fuses cartridge
fuses
2A Grey Grey
3A Violet Violet
4A Pink Pink
5A Tan Tan
7.5A Brown Brown
10A Red Red
15A Blue Blue
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue
25A Natural Natural
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink
40A Orange Green Green
50A Red Red Red
60A Blue Yellow
70A Tan Brown
80A Natural Black
Passenger compartment fuse panel

The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by
the brake pedal. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. To remove
the fuse panel cover, pull up on the latch on the right or left side of the
cover.
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel
cover.
232
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
The fuses are coded as follows:

Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse
Location Rating Panel Description
1 Relay Accessory delay relay 1
2 Relay Accessory delay relay 2
3 10A Front wiper motor Run feed
4 5A B+ feed to outside mirrors
5 20A Vent window power feed/Radio
feed
6 5A Driver door switch
illumination/Passenger door
switch illumination
7 10A Rear wiper Run feed
8 10A Cluster/Electronic Automatic
Temperature Control (EATC) B+
feed, DVD
9 10A Passive Anti-theft System (PATS)
LED feed
10 5A Auxiliary radio
11 5A Auxiliary climate control
system/Power Liftgate
Module/Left and right power
sliding door module/Data Link
Connector (DLC)/Clock B+ feeds
233
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse

Location Rating Panel Description
12 5A Brake-Shift Interlock (BSI) Run
feed, Climate control system Run
feed
13 5A Compass/Driver heated
seat/Passenger heated
seats/Reverse sensing
system/Power Liftgate
Module/Power sliding door Run
feeds
14 5A Underhood fuse box Run feed,
Front blower Run feed
15 10A Brake On-Off (BOO) switch B+
16 5A Steering angle/Cluster/Power
sliding door and power liftgate
inhibit LED/Electrochromatic
mirror Run/Start/Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
17 10A Restraint Control Module
(RCM)/Passenger Air bag Disable
Indicator (PADI)/Passenger
Occupant Detection System
(PODS) Run/Start
18 10A Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
module/Brake pressure
switch/Speed control Run/Start
19 5A PATS/Cluster/Air bag
LED/Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) relay Run/Start
20 10A Liftgate Start feed, Radio Start
feed
21 10A Starter relay power START
234
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicles main electrical systems from overloads.
Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current
fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to

the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the

Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
To remove the cover of the power distribution box, pull the release
latches at both ends of the cover, then pull the cover up.
235
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box Description
Location Rating
1 Not used
2 30A** Right cooling fan
3 30A** Left cooling fan
4 30A** Starter solenoid
5 30A** Right-hand power sliding door
6 30A** SJB accessory #2 (driver power window)
7 30A** Auxiliary blower motor
8 40A** Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) #2 (coil
power)
9 30A** Power liftgate
10 30A** SJB accessory #1 (passenger window,
radio, vent windows)
11 30A** Left power seat/heated seat
12 40A** ABS #1 (pump motor)
13 40A** Rear defroster
14 30A** Front climate control system blower
motor
15 30A** Right power seat/heated seat
16 30A** Left-hand power sliding door
20 Mini relay Powertrain Control Module (PCM) power
21 Mini relay Horn
22 Micro relay A/C clutch
23 Micro relay High beams
24 Mini relay Starter
25 Micro relay Fuel pump
26 Not used
27 Not used
28 Mini relay Auxiliary blower
29 Micro relay Trailer park lamps
30 Micro relay Left trailer stop/turn lamps
236
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)

Location Rating
31 Micro relay Right trailer stop/turn lamps
32 Mini relay Rear defroster
40 15A* Engine #1 (A/C relay coil, IMRC, HEGO
sensors, Canister purge, Transaxle,
Canister vent)
41 25A* Horn
42 10A* A/C clutch
43 15A* Engine #2 (Cooling fan relays, Injectors,
PCM, MAF sensor, IAC, Ignition coil,
ESM)
44 10A* Heated PCV
45 15A* High beams
46 20A* Trailer stop/turn lamps
47 15A* Fuel pump driver module
48 Not used
49 10A* PCM KAP
50 10A* Alternator
51 10A* Adjustable pedals (non-memory) or
memory module
52 20A* Trailer tow park lamps
53 10A* Heated mirrors
54 30A* Front wiper motor
55 25A* Rear wiper motor
56 30A* Premium sound radio
57 20A* Spare
58 30A* SJB #1 Center High-Mounted Stop
Lamp (CHMSL), License plate lamps,
OBD II, Dome lamp, Auxiliary blend
doors, Switch illumination (feeds
F8, F9, F10 and F11)
59 20A* Radio (non-premium)
60 30A* SJB #4 Back-up lamps, Door locks
237
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)

Location Rating
61 20A* Spare
62 30A* SJB #3 Right cornering/auxiliary lamps,
Right low beam, Left front park/turn
lamps, Left rear park/stop/turn lamps,
Instrument panel courtesy lamps, Step
well lamps, Left signal mirror, Clock,
Cluster, Message center (SJB F15),
Switch illumination for: overhead
console, DVD/Rear climate control
system, Headlamp switch illumination,
Climate control illumination
63 20A* Instrument panel power point, Cigar
lighter
64 20A* Ignition switch #1 feed
65 30A* SJB #2 Left cornering/auxiliary lamps,
Left low beam, Right front park/turn
lamps, Right rear park/stop/turn lamps,
Puddle lamps, Mirror signals, Visors, 2nd
and 3rd row lamps, Cargo lamp,
Defroster indicator
66 20A* 2nd and 3rd row seat power points
67 20A* Ignition switch #2 feed
70 Not used
71 Not used
72 Not used
73 Not used
74 Not used
75 Diode PCM
76 Diode A/C clutch
* Mini Fuse ** Cartridge Fuse
238
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Auxiliary relay box (cooling fans)
The relay box is located in the engine compartment by the radiator.

Fuse/Relay Fuse amp Description
location rating
1 Cooling fan relay #4
6 40A* Right-hand cooling fan motor (Vehicles with
trailer tow package only)
7 15A** Low-speed cooling fan circuit breaker
(Vehicles with trailer tow package only)
8 40A* Left-hand cooling fan motor (Vehicles with
trailer tow package)
10A** Low-speed cooling fan circuit breaker
(Vehicles without trailer tow package)
* Maxi fuse **Circuit breaker
JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and
clothing, if contacted.
239
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic
transmissions do not have push-start capability; doing so may
damage the catalytic converter.
Preparing your vehicle

When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission
may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicles electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
240
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
+
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
241
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
+
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicles engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
242
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Removing the jumper cables
+
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the

booster vehicles battery.
243
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
+
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicles battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicles battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
244
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing

service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed by wheel lift or flatbed
equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not
approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift, the front
wheels must be placed on a dolly to prevent damage to the transaxle.
If your vehicle must be towed with the drive wheels on the ground:
Place the transaxle in N (Neutral).
Do not exceed the distance of 50 miles (80 km).
Do not exceed the speed of 35 mph (56 km/h).
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
245
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
You must take your Ford vehicle to an authorized dealer for warranty
repairs. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will
provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and/or
equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all
warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies or procedures, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship
Center at 1-800-392-3673 (FORD).
Away from home
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the authorized
dealer could provide, after following the steps described above, contact
the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to
help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
246
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, or if you need more help than the authorized dealer could
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
In Canada:
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-387-9333
www.lincolncanada.com
In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle, please have the
following information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre:
Your telephone number (home and business)
The name of the authorized dealer and the city where the authorized
dealer is located
The year and make of your vehicle
The date of vehicle purchase
The current odometer reading
The vehicle identification number (VIN)
Additional Assistance
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish
to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.).
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your states warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
247
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the
Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing
replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This
dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are independent of the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicles applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
248
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. ONLY)
The Dispute Settlement Board is:
an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes.
available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company
vehicles.
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without
incurring obligations per applicable state law.
What kinds of cases does the Board review?
Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance concerns as
on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light
trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle
warranty are eligible for review, except those involving:
a non-Ford product
a non-authorized dealership
sales disputes between customer and authorized dealer except those
associated with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicles
performance as designed
a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a
service or product concern is being reviewed
items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including
maintenance and wear items)
alleged personal injury/property damage claims
cases currently in litigation
vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes
(except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to
review commercial vehicles)
vehicles with non-U.S. warranties
Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility
is dependent upon the customers possession of the vehicle.
Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique
brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin
purchasers/lessees.
249
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
Board membership
The Board consists of:
Three consumer representatives
An authorized dealer representative
Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by
an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen
from authorized dealer management, recognized for their business
leadership qualities.
What the Board needs
To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the
DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application
form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return
receipt requested.
Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you
will receive an acknowledgment indicating:
The file number assigned to your application.
The toll-free phone number of the DSBs independent administrator.
Your authorized dealer and a Ford Motor Company representative will
then be asked to submit statements.
To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information:
Legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders
relevant to the case.
The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed
on your vehicle ownership license.
The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s).
The current mileage.
The name of the authorized dealer(s) who sold or serviced the
vehicle.
A brief description of your unresolved concern.
A brief summary of the action taken by the authorized dealer(s) and
Ford Motor Company.
The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the
authorized dealer(s).
A description of the action you expect to resolve your concern.
You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not
qualify for Board review.
250
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
Oral presentations
If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question
6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation
before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the
case whether or not an oral presentation is made. An oral presentation
may be requested by the Board as well.
Making a decision
Board members review all available information related to each
complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial
decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party.
Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that
all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board
generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to
consider some cases.
After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a
form on which to accept or reject the Boards decision. The decisions of
the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the authorized
dealer) but not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies
available to them under state or federal law.
To request a DSB Brochure/Application
For a brochure/application, speak to your authorized dealer or write/call
the Board at the following address/phone number:
Dispute Settlement Board
P.O. Box 1424
Waukesha, WI 531871424
18004283718
You may also contact the North American Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952
or by writing to the Center at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, Michigan 48121
251
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrators
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. It provides
the following:
Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain
maintenance and wear items).
Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper
Warranty expires.
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating authorized Canadian
dealer. There are several plans available in various time, distance and
deductible combinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving
needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing and
rental coverage.
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of
more than 4,600 participating authorized Canadian dealers.
252
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this
information is subject to change, please ask your authorized dealer for
complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or
visit the Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the
nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, write
or call:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market
Operations.
253
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNERS LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French owners guide
French Owners Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service
Publications, P.O. Box 1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, or Ford
Motor Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 18004249393 (or 3660123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write
to:
NHTSA
400 Seventh Street
U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
254
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3A), which is
available from your authorized dealer.
Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicles
paintwork and trim over time.
Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
WAXING
Applying Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45) to your vehicle every six
months will assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.
Wash the vehicle first.
Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Motorcraft Premium
Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product.
Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will gray or stain the parts over time.
255
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Cleaning
Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with the sliding door
electrical contact switches. Paint sealant or other contaminants could
interfere with the proper operation of the power locks or power
sliding door. If necessary, clean the contacts with Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover (ZC-42) to remove any sealant. Do not use any abrasives
on the contact surfaces.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your
vehicles color. Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the drivers
door jamb) to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37A),
which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake
dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
256
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Cleaning
Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.
Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning

the engine.
Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3A).
If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicles glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellant
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
257
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Cleaning
The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.
The wiper blades can be cleaned with Motorcraft Premium Windshield
Washer Concentrate (ZC-32), available from your authorized dealer.
This washer fluid contains special solution in addition to alcohol which
helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and
windshield from automated car wash facilities.
Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they
appear worn or do not function properly.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defrosters heated grid lines.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry
cloth, or use Motorcraft Dash & Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A).
Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of
the air bag system.
Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in

contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
INTERIOR TRIM
Clean the interior trim areas with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry
cloth; you may also use Motorcraft Dash & Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A).
Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish.
258
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Cleaning
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side
air bags:
Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14).
If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicles
safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning

the seat-mounted side air bag. Such products could contaminate
the side air bag system and affect performance of the side air bag in a
collision.
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)

Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11A). Dry the area with a soft cloth.
To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11D), available from your authorized dealer.
Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
259
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Cleaning
FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality
products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These
quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality
materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use
the following products or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Car Care Kit (ZC-26)
Motorcraft Car Wash (Canada only) (CXC-21)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC8A)
Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant (U.S. only) (ZC-40-A)
Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38A)
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (U.S. only) (ZC-11A)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3A)
Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft One Step Wash and Wax Concentrate (ZC-6-A)
Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45)
Motorcraft Premium Car Wash Concentrate (U.S. only) (ZC-17-B)
Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A)
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Motorcraft Triple Clean (U.S. only) (ZC-13)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) (CXC-94)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37A)
260
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle:
We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy
location.
We provide scheduled maintenance information which makes
tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty
Guide/Owner Information Guide to find out which parts and services
are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE

Do not work on a hot engine.
Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
Keep all open flames and other lit material away from the battery and
all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off

1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the engine on

1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
261
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom left corner of the instrument
panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is
located under the front center of
the hood.
3. Lift the hood and secure it with
the prop rod. Your vehicles hood
has two locations for the prop rod
to be placed. These locations
provide two different hood opening
positions. Use the location which
best suits your needs.
262
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.9L/4.2L V6 engines
10 1 2 3
9 8 7 6 5 4
1. Brake fluid reservoir

2. Air filter assembly
3. Power distribution box
4. Battery
5. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
6. Engine oil dipstick
7. Engine oil filler cap
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
9. Engine coolant reservoir
10. Power steering fluid reservoir
263
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specification WSB-M8B16A2.
Do not use any special washer fluid
such as windshield water repellent
type fluid or bug wash. They may
cause squeaking, chatter noise,
streaking and smearing. Refer to
Lubricant specifications in this
chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicles paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 F (4.5C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
Checking and adding washer fluid for the liftgate
Washer fluid for the liftgate is supplied by the same reservoir as the
windshield.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil

Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
264
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the
engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it
again.
If the oil level is within this
range, the oil level is acceptable.
DO NOT ADD OIL.
If the oil level is below this

mark, engine oil must be added
to raise the level within the
normal operating range.
265
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
If required, add engine oil to the
engine. Refer to Adding engine
oil in this chapter.
Do not overfill the engine

with oil. Oil levels above this
mark may cause engine
damage. If the engine is
overfilled, some oil must be
removed from the engine by an
authorized dealer.
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil

1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
266
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil.

Only use oils Certified For Gasoline Engines by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engines warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or an
equivalent 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A. SAE
5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability
performance meeting all requirements for your vehicles engine.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or
another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application.
267
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the

battery electrolyte level. Refer to scheduled maintenance information
for the service interval schedules.
Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the level indicator.
Do not overfill the battery cells.
If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water
to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high
mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery
cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the
charging system checked.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
268
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the

end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite
corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric

acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and

lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
To account for customer driving habits and conditions, your automatic

transaxle electronically controls the shift feel by using an adaptive
learning strategy. This feature is designed to optimize shift smoothness.
It is normal for your transaxle to shift abruptly during the first few
hundred kilometers (miles) of operation until the adaptive strategy has
been learned. The adaptive learning strategy is maintained by power
from the battery. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is
installed, the transaxle must relearn its adaptive strategy. Optimal
shifting will resume within a few hundred kilometers (miles) of
operation.
Because your vehicles engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. With your foot on the brake pedal and with the A/C on, put the
vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
269
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
If the battery has been discharged, disconnected or a new battery has
been installed, the power sliding door may need to be reset. Refer to
Power Sliding Door-Resetting the PSD in the Driver Controls chapter.
Always dispose of automotive
RE
AD
batteries in a responsible manner.
TU
Follow your local authorized
LE
RN
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
RECYCLE
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,
which equates to a freeze point of -34F (-36C). Coolant concentration
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the
Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014R1060). The level of coolant
should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD
FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add
coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
5050 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
Freeze protection down to -34F (-36C).
270
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Boiling protection up to 265F (129C).
Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the
COLD FILL RANGE as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
271
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid

container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.
Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant

(yellow-colored), VC-7A (U.S., except CA, OR and NM),
VC-7B (CA, OR and NM), meeting Ford Specification
WSS-M97B51A1.
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6, may
darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from
yellow to golden tan.
Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such
as Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 and VC-3
(US) or CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford specification
WSS-M97B44D with the factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft
Specialty Orange Engine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life
product with your factory filled coolant can result in degraded
corrosion protection.
A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the FULL COLD level. For all other vehicles which have a
272
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see
above), to within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on
the reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill
the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.)
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to 34 F/36 C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
273
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate

manner. Follow your communitys regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicles cooling system can hold, refer
to Refill capacities in this section.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than 34 F [36 C ]):
It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
274
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or

mishandled.
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:

Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
refueling your vehicle.
Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
275
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an
ungrounded fuel container.
Refueling
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe
injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle this is against the law in some places;
Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel
276
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
Place approved fuel container on the ground.
DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel Filler Cap

Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/4 of a turn until it
stops.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until it clicks.
If the Check Fuel Cap indicator comes on or if Service Engine
Soon/Check Engine indicator comes on and stays on when you start the
engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. Turn off the
engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
277
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel

Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law
and could damage your vehicle.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that
these additives can cause your vehicles emission control system to
deteriorate more rapidly. In Canada, premium grade fuel generally
contains more metallic additives than regular fuel. We recommend using
regular grade fuel. In Canada, many fuels contain metallic additives, but
fuels free of such additives may be available; check with your local fuel
dealer.
Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system
components.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
87
Regular unleaded gasoline with
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
We do not recommend the use of (R+M)/2 METHOD
gasolines labeled as Regular that
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. Premium
unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use
Regular unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to
become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your authorized
dealer.
278
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system.
Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your
fuel may not be covered by your warranty.
Many of the worlds automakers approved the World-wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-wide Fuel Charter.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated cleaner-burning gasolines to
improve air quality.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine.
Your Check Engine indicator may come on. For more information on
the Check Engine indicator, refer to the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
Fuel Filter
For fuel filter replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the fuel filter.
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.
279
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles (1,600
km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 2,000 miles-3,000 miles (3,000 km5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities
section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
Use the same filling rate setting (low medium high) each time
the tank is filled.
Allow no more than three automatic click-offs when filling.
Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
280
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicles fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
Slow down gradually.
Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
281
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs.
Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel
economy.
Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in
this chapter.
Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
810 miles (1216 km) of driving.
Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
Close windows for high speed driving.
282
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
EPA window sticker
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle.
The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy
comparisons with other vehicles.
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km)
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
Use only the specified fuel listed.
Avoid running out of fuel.
Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the Check Engine light, charging system warning light

or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or
loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system is
not working properly.
283
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially

lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By

law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicles emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up
specifications.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engines
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). This OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction.
Temporary malfunctions may cause your indicator to illuminate.
Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuelthe engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel and/or properly tightening the fuel cap. After three
driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the indicator should turn offA driving cycle consists of a
cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving. No additional
vehicle service is required.
If the indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of
the on-board diagnostics system. If your Check engine/Service engine
284
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
soon light is on, refer to the description in the Warning lights and
chimes section of the Instrument Cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not
pass the I/M test with the Check engine/Service engine soon light on.
If the vehicles powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced,
the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a not ready for I/M test
condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a
minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as
described below:
First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway.
Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with
at least four idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete.
POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid.
Refer to the scheduled maintenance
guide for the service interval
schedules. If adding fluid is
necessary, use only MERCON ATF.
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN
and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if the level is within this range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the correct operating range. Be sure to put the
cap back on the reservoir.
285
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
BRAKE FLUID
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels between the MIN and
MAX lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating
range the performance of your
brake system could be
compromised; seek service from
your authorized dealer immediately.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transaxle does not consume
fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the transaxle is not
working properly, i.e., if the transaxle slips or shifts slowly or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is warmed up
(approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic
during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be
turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before
checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
286
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated areas for normal operating temperature.
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is at the bottom of the dipstick
and the outside temperatures are
above 50F (10C).
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperatures 150F-170F (66C-77C) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles (30
km) of driving.
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at normal operating
temperature (150F-170F
[66C-77C]).
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the safe range
may result in transaxle failure. An
overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the
Lubricant specifications section in this chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transaxle component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250 mL) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by a qualified
technician.
An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns
and/or possible damage.
287
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow
Sensor electrical connector from the
air outlet tube.
Reposition the locking clip (on the

connector) and squeeze connector
to remove.
288
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
2. Loosen the hose clamp located
closest to the air cleaner.
3. Remove the air cleaner assembly

from the vehicle.
4. Release the two clamps that

secure the cover to the air filter
housing and place the cover aside.
5. Remove the air filter element

from the air filter housing.
6. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
289
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
7. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter housing and cover.
8. Replace the air filter housing
cover and secure the clamps. Be
sure all the tabs on the bottom edge
are properly aligned.
9. Reinstall the air cleaner assembly

into the vehicle. Ensure the tabs on
the inlet tube are secure in the
sheet metal.
290
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
10. Ensure the pads on the bottom
of the air cleaner assembly are
properly seated.
11. Reconnect the outlet tube to the

air cleaner assembly and tighten the
clamp.
12. Reconnect the Mass Air Flow

Sensor electrical connector to the
outlet tube. Make sure the locking
tab on the connector is in locked
position.
Note: If hose clamp is not secured properly or Mass Air Flow Sensor
electrical connector is not properly installed the Check Engine light will
illuminate when vehicle is operated.
Note: Do not use oil-impregnated air filter elements. Failure to use the
correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage. The
customer warranty may be voided for any damage to the engine if the
correct air filter element is not used.
291
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component 3.9L OHV V6 engine 4.2L OHV V6 engine
Air filter element FA-1679 FA-1679
Battery BXT-59 BXT-59
BXT-65-750 BXT-65-750
Fuel filter FG-986B FG-986B
Oil filter FL-400S FL-400S
1
PCV valve
2
Spark plugs
1
The PCV valve is a critical emission component. It is one of the items
listed in scheduled maintenance information and is essential to the
life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.
For PCV valve replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
changing the PCV valve.
Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as a Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement part. The customer warranty may be void
for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not
used.
2
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to the
changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
292
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
REFILL CAPACITIES
Fluid Ford Part Application Capacity
Name
Brake fluid Motorcraft High All Fill to MAX line
Performance on reservoir
DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake
Fluid1
Engine oil Motorcraft SAE 3.9L engine 5.0 quarts
(includes filter 5W-20 Premium (4.7L)
change)3 Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil (US)
Motorcraft SAE 4.2L engine 5.0 quarts
5W-20 Super (4.7L)
Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
Engine coolant2 Motorcraft Without rear 14.8 quarts
Premium Gold heater (14.0L)
Engine Coolant With rear heater 15.9 quarts
(yellow-colored) (15.0L)
Power steering Motorcraft All Fill to line on
fluid MERCON ATF reservoir
Fuel tank N/A All 26.0 gallons
(98.4L)
Automatic Motorcraft All 13.7 quarts
transaxle fluid MERCONV (13.0L)
ATF
Windshield Motorcraft All Fill to line on
washer fluid Premium reservoir
Windshield
Washer
Concentrate
1
Use only brake fluids certified to meet Ford specifications. Refer to
Lubricant Specifications in this chapter. DOT 3 fluid is recommended.
However, if DOT 3 is not available, DOT 4 fluid can be used.
2
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
3
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine
oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification
WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
293
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
Item Ford part Ford part Ford
name number specification
Brake fluid Motorcraft PM-1 ESA-M6C25-A
High
Performance
DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake
Fluid1
Door Silicone XL-6 ESR-M13P4-A
weatherstrips Lubricant
Engine coolant Motorcraft VC-7-A (U.S., WSS-M97B51-A1
Premium Gold except CA, OR
Engine and NM), VC-7-B
Coolant (CA, OR and NM)
(yellow
colored)
Engine oil Motorcraft XO-5W20-QSP WSS-M2C930-A
SAE 5W-20 (US) with API
Premium CXO-5W20LSP12 Certification Mark
Synthetic (Canada)
Blend Motor
Oil (US)
Motorcraft
SAE 5W-20
Super
Premium
Motor Oil
(Canada)
Door latch, Multi-Purpose XG-4 or XL-5 ESB-M1C93-B
hood latch, Grease
auxiliary hood
latch, door and
liftgate hinges,
striker plates,
seat tracks,
sliding door
both sides
(upper and
lower track) and
fuel filler door
hinge.
294
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Item Ford part Ford part Ford

name number specification
Lock cylinders Motorcraft XL-1 none
Penetrating
and Lock
Lubricant
Power steering Motorcraft XT-2-QDX MERCON
fluid MERCON
ATF
Automatic Motorcraft XT-5-QM MERCONV
transaxle MERCONV
(4F50N) ATF2
Disc brake Motorcraft XG-3-A ESE-M1C171-A
caliper rails Silicone Brake
Caliper
Grease and
Dielectric
Compound
Constant Motorcraft CV XG-5 WSS-MIC258-A1
velocity joints Joint Grease
(High Temp.)
Windshield Motorcraft ZC-32A WSB-M8B16A2
washer fluid Premium
Windshield
Washer
Concentrate
1
Use only brake fluids certified to meet Ford specifications. DOT 3 fluid
is recommended. However, if DOT 3 is not available, DOT 4 fluid can be
used.
2
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used MERCON and
MERCONV are not interchangeable. DO NOT MIX MERCON and
MERCONV. Refer to scheduled maintenance information to
determine the correct service interval.
295
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
ENGINE DATA
Engine 3.9 L OHV V6 engine 4.2L OHV V6 engine
Cubic inches 232 256
Required fuel 87 octane 87 octane
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 1-4-2-5-3-6
Ignition system EDIS EDIS
Spark plug gap 0.0520.056 inch 0.0520.056 inch
(1.321.42mm) (1.321.42mm)
Compression ratio 9.36:1 9.27:1
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS
Vehicle dimensions Wagon - inches Van - inches (mm)
(mm)
(1) Overall length 201.0 (5105) 201.0 (5105)
(2) Overall width 76.4 (1941) 76.4 (1941)
(3) Overall height 68.5 (1740)1 68.8 (1748)2
(4) Wheelbase 120.8 (3069) 120.8 (3069)
(5) Track - Front 64.7 (1644) 64.7 (1644)
(5) Track - Rear 62.8 (1595) 62.8 (1595)
1
Equipped with P225/60R16 tires.
2
Equipped with P235/60R16 tires.
296
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Certification label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure by the
trailing edge of the drivers door or
297
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
attached to a metal tag and is
located on the driver side XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
instrument panel. (Please note that
in the graphic XXXX is
representative of your vehicle
identification number.)
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following

information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake type and Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR)
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
Engine number
The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification
number) is stamped on the engine block, transmission, frame and
transfer case (if equipped).
298
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Transmission/Transaxle code designations
You can find a
transmission/transaxle code on the
Label . The following table tells you
which transmission or transaxle
each code represents.
Code Description
N Four-speed automatic (AX4N)
299
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Accessories
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local authorized Ford or Ford of Canada dealer.
These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory
is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Fords rigorous
engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or
replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Ford Accessory found to
be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the
warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective
accessory. The accessory will be warranted for whichever provides you
the greatest benefit:
12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
This means that Genuine Ford Accessories purchased along with your
new vehicle and installed by the authorized dealer are covered for the
full length of your New Vehicles Limited Warranty 3 years or 36,000
miles (60,000 km) (whichever occurs first). Contact your authorized
dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
Not all accessories are available for all models.
The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessory products. Not
all accessories are available for all models. For a complete listing of the
accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your
authorized dealer or visit our online store at:
www.fordaccessoriesstore.com.
Exterior style
Bug shields
Deflectors
Front end covers
Headlamps, fog lights and Daytime Running Lamps (DRLs)
Splash guards
Interior style
Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors
Floor mats
Lifestyle
Bike racks
Cargo organization and management
300
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Accessories
Rear seat entertainment systems - DVD
Ash cup/coin holder
Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories
Roof carriers
Peace of mind
First aid and safety kits
Full vehicle covers
Locking gas cap
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
Mobile-Ease hands-free communication system
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the drivers side hood.
Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to
the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
301
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Index
A acid, treating emergencies .....268
jumping a disabled battery ....239
Accessory delay ..........................68 maintenance-free ....................268
AdvanceTrac ..............................220 replacement, specifications ...292
Air cleaner filter ...............288, 292 servicing ..................................268
Air filter, cabin ............................44 BeltMinder .................................146
Airbag supplemental restraint Brakes ........................................219
system ........................152, 159, 161 anti-lock ...........................219220
and child safety seats ............154 anti-lock brake system (ABS)
description ..............152, 159, 161 warning light ...........................219
disposal ....................................164 fluid, checking and adding ....286
driver airbag ............154, 160, 162 fluid, refill capacities ..............293
indicator light .................159, 164 fluid, specifications .........294, 296
operation .................154, 160, 162 lubricant specifications ..294, 296
passenger airbag .....154, 160, 162 parking ....................................220
side airbag ...............................159 shift interlock ..........................223
Antifreeze Bulbs ............................................51
(see Engine coolant) ................270
Anti-lock brake system C
(see Brakes) ......................219220
Anti-theft system ......................111 Capacities for refilling fluids ....293
arming the system ..................111 Cargo net .....................................92
disarming a triggered
system .....................................111 Cassette tape player .......18, 20, 26
Audio system Cell phone use ............................74
(see Radio) ................18, 20, 23, 26 Child safety restraints ..............165
Automatic transaxle .................223 child safety belts ....................165
fluid, adding ............................286 Child safety seats ......................168
fluid, checking ........................286 in front seat ............................169
fluid, refill capacities ..............293 in rear seat ..............................169
fluid, specification ..................296 tether anchorage hardware ...172
Automatic transmission
Cleaning your vehicle
driving an automatic
engine compartment ..............256
overdrive .................................225
instrument panel ....................258
Auxiliary power point .................66 interior .....................................259
Axle interior trim ............................258
lubricant specifications ..........294 plastic parts ............................257
washing ....................................255
B
waxing .....................................255
Battery .......................................268 wheels ......................................256
302
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Index
wiper blades ............................257 Dipstick
automatic transmission
Clock ............................................66 fluid ..........................................286
Compass, electronic ....................59 engine oil .................................264
calibration .................................60 Doors ...........................................61
set zone adjustment .................60 lubricant specifications ..........294
power sliding ............................62
Console ........................................74
overhead ....................................58 Driving under special
conditions ..................................226
Controls through water .........................228
power seat ...............................114
steering column ........................74 E
Coolant
Emergencies, roadside
checking and adding ..............270 jump-starting ..........................239
refill capacities ................274, 293
specifications ..................294, 296 Emission control system ..........283
Engine ........................................296
Cruise control
cleaning ...................................256
(see Speed control) ....................71 coolant .....................................270
Cupholder(s) .............................117 idle speed control ...................268
lubrication
Customer Assistance ................229
specifications ..................294, 296
Ford Extended Service refill capacities ........................293
Plan ..........................................252 service points ..................263264
Getting assistance outside the starting after a collision .........230
U.S. and Canada .....................253
Engine block heater .................218
Getting roadside assistance ...229
Getting the service you Engine oil ..................................264
need .........................................246 change oil soon warning,
Ordering additional owners message center .......................264
literature .................................254 checking and adding ..............264
The Dispute Settlement dipstick ....................................264
Board .......................................249 filter, specifications ........267, 292
Utilizing the recommendations ...................267
Mediation/Arbitration refill capacities ........................293
Program ...................................252 specifications ..................294, 296
Exhaust fumes ..........................218
D
F
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................46 Floor mats ...................................75
303
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Index
Fluid capacities .........................293 flash to pass ..............................47
Fuel ............................................275 high beam .................................47
calculating fuel economy .......280 replacing bulbs .........................53
cap ...........................................277 turning on and off ....................45
capacity ...................................293
choosing the right fuel ...........278 Heating
comparisons with EPA fuel heating and air conditioning
economy estimates .................283 system .................................34, 36
detergent in fuel .....................279 Homelink wireless control
filling your vehicle with system ..........................................75
fuel ...........................275, 277, 280
filter, specifications ........279, 292 Hood ..........................................262
fuel pump shut-off switch .....230
improving fuel economy ........280 I
octane rating ...................278, 296
quality ......................................278 Ignition ...............................215, 296
running out of fuel .................279 Infant seats
safety information relating to (see Safety seats) .....................168
automotive fuels .....................275 Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
Fuses ..................................231232 testing ........................................284
Instrument panel ........................66
G cleaning ...................................258
cluster ........................................10
Garage Door Opener lighting up panel and
(see Homelink wireless control interior .......................................47
system) ........................................75
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............277 J
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................280 Jump-starting your vehicle ......239
Gauges .........................................15 K
H Keyless entry system ...............104
autolock ...................................106
Hazard flashers .........................230
Keys ...........................................109
Head restraints .................112, 116 positions of the ignition .........215
Headlamps ...................................45
aiming ........................................48 L
autolamp system .......................45
bulb specifications ....................52 Lamps
daytime running lights .............46 autolamp system .......................45
304
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Index
bulb replacement Motorcraft parts ........260, 279, 292
specifications chart ..................52
daytime running light ...............46 O
headlamps .................................45
headlamps, flash to pass ..........47 Octane rating ............................278
instrument panel, dimming .....47 Oil (see Engine oil) ..................264
interior lamps .....................5051
Overdrive ...................................224
replacing bulbs .............51, 5355
Lane change indicator P
(see Turn signal) ........................49
Liftgate ............................88, 92, 99 Parking brake ............................220
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....292
Lights, warning and indicator ....10
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........219 Passenger Occupant
Classification Sensor .................138
Load limits .................................203
Pedals (see Power adjustable
Locks foot pedals) .................................71
autolock ...................................106
Power adjustable foot pedals .....71
childproof ..................................95
doors ..........................................94 Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................235
Low tire warning .................15, 200
Power door locks ................94, 106
Lubricant specifications ...294, 296
Power liftgate ........................88, 99
Lug nuts ....................................191
Power mirrors .............................69
Luggage rack ...............................92
Power point .................................66
Lumbar support, seats .............115
Power steering ..........................223
M fluid, checking and adding ....285
fluid, refill capacity ................293
Message center ...........................79 fluid, specifications .........294, 296
english/metric button ...............82 Power Windows ...........................68
system check button ................82
warning messages .....................83 R
Mirrors ...................................58, 69
automatic dimming rearview Radio ..........................18, 20, 23, 26
mirror ........................................69 Relays ........................................231
fold away ...................................70
heated ........................................70 Remote entry system .................98
programmable memory ..........103 illuminated entry ..............47, 102
side view mirrors (power) .......69 locking/unlocking doors .....94, 98
signal .........................................70 Reverse sensing system ...........226
305
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Index
Roadside assistance ..................229 Spare tire (see Changing
the Tire) ............................184, 186
Roof rack .....................................92
Spark plugs,
S specifications .....................292, 296
Specification chart,
Safety Belt Maintenance ..........151 lubricants ...........................294, 296
Safety belts (see Safety Speed control ..............................71
restraints) ..........137, 140, 142144 Starting your vehicle ........215217
Safety Canopy ...........................161 jump starting ..........................239
Steering wheel
Safety defects, reporting ..........254
controls ......................................74
Safety tilting .........................................57
restraints ...........137, 140, 142144
belt minder .............................146 T
extension assembly ................150
for adults .........................142144 Tilt steering wheel ......................57
for children .....................164165 Tire warning ..............................200
Occupant Classification
Sensor ......................................138 Tires ...........................178179, 200
safety belt maintenance .........151 alignment ................................198
warning light and care ..........................................197
chime ...............................145146 changing ..................184, 186187
checking the pressure ............181
Safety seats for children ..........168 inspecting and inflating .........180
Safety Compliance label .........................................196
Certification Label ....................297 replacing ..................................183
rotating ....................................199
Seat belts
safety practices .......................198
(see Safety restraints) .............137
sidewall information ...............192
Seats ..........................................112 snow tires and chains ............203
child safety seats ....................168 spare tire .................................185
front seats ...............112113, 115 terminology .............................179
memory seat ...................103, 116 tire grades ...............................179
second row treadwear ........................178, 197
seats .................118119, 122123
Towing .......................................210
third row
recreational towing .................214
seats .................123, 130, 134136
trailer towing ..........................210
SecuriLock passive anti-theft wrecker ....................................245
system ........................................109
Transaxle
Servicing your vehicle ..............261 automatic operation ...............223
306
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
Index
fluid, refill capacities ..............293 W
lubricant specifications ..........296
Transmission Warning lights (see Lights) .......10
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....223 Washer fluid ..............................264
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................286 Water, Driving through .............228
lubricant specifications ..........294
Windows
Turn signal ..................................49 power .........................................68
rear wiper/washer .....................56
V
Windshield washer fluid and
Vehicle dimensions ...................296 wipers ..........................................56
Vehicle Identification Number checking and adding fluid .....264
(VIN) ..........................................298 liftgate reservoir .....................264
Vehicle loading ..........................203 replacing wiper blades .............57
Ventilating your vehicle ...........218 Wrecker towing .........................245
307
2005 Freestar (win)

USA (fus)
308
309
310
311
312

4 Instrument Cluster 10: 2005 Freestar (Win) Owners Guide (Post-2002-Fmt) USA (Fus)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

4 Instrument Cluster 10: 2005 Freestar (Win) Owners Guide (Post-2002-Fmt) USA (Fus)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

4 Instrument Cluster 10: 2005 Freestar (Win) Owners Guide (Post-2002-Fmt) USA (Fus)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Table of Contents

2005 Freestar (win)

2005 Freestar (win)

All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical

2005 Freestar (win)

2005 Freestar (win)

Warning symbols in this guide

Warning symbols on your vehicle

2005 Freestar (win)

2005 Freestar (win)

Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should

MIDDLE EAST/NORTH AFRICA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION

2005 Freestar (win)

Vehicle Symbol Glossary

Safety Alert See Owners Guide

Fasten Safety Belt Air Bag-Front

Air Bag-Side Child Seat

Child Seat Installation Child Seat Lower

Child Seat Tether

Powertrain Malfunction Speed Control

Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher

Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment

Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe

Windshield Rear Window

2005 Freestar (win)

Vehicle Symbol Glossary

Panic Alarm Engine Oil

Do Not Open When Hot Battery

Avoid Smoking, Flames,

Explosive Gas Fan Warning

Emission System Engine Air Filter

Low tire pressure

2005 Freestar (win)

2005 Freestar (win)

Anti-lock brake system: If the

2005 Freestar (win)

Check transaxle: Illuminates when

Engine oil pressure: Illuminates

With Message Center

2005 Freestar (win)

Traction Control or TRAC

Speed control: Illuminates when

2005 Freestar (win)

With Message Center

With Message Center

Turn signal: Illuminates when the

2005 Freestar (win)

High beams: Illuminates when the

Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the

2005 Freestar (win)

Engine coolant temperature

Odometer: Registers the total miles (kilometers) of the vehicle.

2005 Freestar (win)

Tachometer: Indicates the engine

Fuel gauge: Indicates

2005 Freestar (win)

Treble: Press to adjust the treble setting. Use / / SEEK,

2005 Freestar (win)

6. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn